JP2020096907A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing occurrence of an abnormal condition from becoming difficult to be noticed by a shop tender or the like in a hall owing to a notification sound.SOLUTION: In a game machine, sound output execution control means synthesizes a notification sound with a performance sound having a muffled sound volume, and outputs the notification sound audibly, in an abnormality notification period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 103

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine that outputs an audio signal amplified to a level according to a volume set by a volume to a speaker (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-30651, A

By the way, in the gaming machine, since a notification sound for notifying a clerk in the hall of the occurrence of an abnormal state is emitted from the speaker, when the volume is turned down and the volume is operated to a low level, in addition to the volume of the effect sound, There is a problem in that the volume becomes low and it is difficult for the clerk in the hall to notice the occurrence of the abnormal state.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to make it difficult for a clerk in a hall to notice the occurrence of an abnormal state due to the notification sound even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced. It is to provide a game machine capable of preventing such a situation.

The following are effective solutions for achieving the above object. The operation and the like will be described as necessary. Further, for ease of understanding, the configurations and the like corresponding to the embodiments of the invention are also shown as appropriate, but the invention is not limited thereto.

(Solution 1)
A plurality of audio output means for outputting a notification sound for notifying an abnormal state to the gaming machine, and a sound effect produced by the progress of the game,
Production display means,
First volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume output from the audio output means,
Production control means for controlling the voice output means and the production display means based on the progress of production,
A gaming machine comprising: a second volume adjusting means different from the first volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume output from the audio output means,
Of the first volume adjusting means and the second volume adjusting means, the first volume adjusting means is an adjusting means that cannot be operated by the player,
The effect control means,
Production sound volume adjustment control means for setting the volume of the production sound according to the operation by operating the first volume adjustment means,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the production sound volume is changed by operating the second volume adjustment means to change the volume of the production sound set by the production sound volume adjustment control means in response to the operation. Control means,
When the initialization condition is satisfied, effect sound initialization control means for setting the volume of the effect sound changed by the effect sound volume change control means to an initial volume not depending on the setting of the player,
Notification sound volume adjustment control means for setting the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying an abnormal state to the gaming machine in the abnormality notification period without depending on the sound volume set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means,
When the abnormality notification period ends, the volume of the effect sound is muted, and when the abnormality notification period ends, the volume of the effect sound is restored to the volume set by the effect sound volume change control means, and the effect sound is muted. Production sound progress continuation control means for continuing the progression of the production sound while
Sound output execution control means for executing control to output the effect sound and the notification sound from the sound output means,
The notification sound volume adjustment control means,
The effect sound volume adjustment control means sets the volume of the effect sound to a low level in response to the operation of the first sound volume adjustment means, or the effect sound volume change control means responds to the operation of the second sound volume adjustment means. In the state in which the volume of the effect sound set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means is being reduced, a volume higher than the volume of the effect sound is set as the volume of the notification sound,
The sound output execution control means,
A game machine characterized in that, in the abnormality notification period, the notification sound and the effect sound muted at the volume are combined, and the notification sound is output in a audible manner.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of the abnormal state due to the notification sound.

It is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a plan view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame which constitute a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame which constitute a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. FIG. 6 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure of an upper shaft support fitting of a main body frame and an upper support fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) seen from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for explaining the relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right back of a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at a door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the upper right front side. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state where the press operation part in the operation unit was pressed. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled and showed the handle apparatus in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a front view shown in the state where the front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame of an embodiment different from the example of Drawing 20 grade from the left front. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing the relation between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation path of the sphere in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of a back cover in the body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the body frame. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko game machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko game machine. FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 90 and the like as seen from the front. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel of the game board of FIG. 93 taken along the vertical direction. FIG. It is a detailed front view of the game board. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 96 as disassembled and seen from the front. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the vicinity of a VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 105 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 104. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a CR unit input/output circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a firing control input circuit. FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC/DC converter. It is a timing chart of a predetermined point in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 6 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 120 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 119 to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 122. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power-on of a payout control part. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power supply of the payout control part of FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 126. It is a flow chart which shows an example of payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball removal switch operation judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball glide judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball gaze operation setting processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of retry operation monitoring processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error release switch operation judging processing. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing (a) at the time of the payout operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation processing (a) from the CR unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part blackout notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation detection switch history creation processing. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches, which is caused by clockwise rotation of a dial operation portion in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches, which is caused by counterclockwise rotation of a dial operation portion in the rotation operation unit. (A) is a list showing ON/OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches according to the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in the rotation operation unit, and (B) is accompanied with the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation part. FIG. 4 is a list diagram showing ON/OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches. It is an explanatory view (range approaching the maximum value side) showing the movement of the initial value updating type counter. It is an explanatory view (range approaching the minimum value side) showing the movement of the initial value update type counter. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the effect|action which variably displays a some decorative pattern in a 1st display mode, (b) is a message which switches a some decorative pattern from a 1st display mode to a 2nd display mode. It is a figure showing an example of the production which displays. It is the figure which shows one example of the production which continues to the figure 155 (b). It is the figure which shows one example of the production which continues in the figure 156. It is the figure which shows one example of the production which continues in the figure 157.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko gaming machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame forming the pachinko gaming machine as seen from the rear, and FIG. 7 is the outer frame, the main body frame forming the pachinko gaming machine, It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of a game board and a door frame.

1 to 7, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, and an outer frame 2 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable to open the front side. A box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, a main body frame 3 and front surfaces of the game board 4 are played. It is provided with a door frame 5 which is rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the person side. On the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. It is provided with a dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

As shown in the drawing, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which an outer frame 2, a body frame 3, and a door frame 5 respectively extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and the lateral width of each of the left and right directions. Are approximately the same as each other, and the vertical dimension in the vertical direction is slightly smaller than the outer frame 2 in the main frame 3 and the door frame 5. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2 and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, in a front view, a game area 1100 in which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. The two upper plates 301 and the lower plate 302 are vertically arranged. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can operate the handle device 500 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotary operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting ball strength according to the rotation angle, and the player can play the game.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. The player cannot insert his or her hand into the game area 1100 to touch the game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, or accessories. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a bar body 1250 that is closed to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment/detachment structure of the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. .. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right extending in the vertical (up and down) direction. The side frame plates 12 and 13 are provided with four connecting members 14 that connect the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, respectively. It is assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) by connecting 13 pieces. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are made of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and vertically penetrate through substantially the center of the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. An engagement cutout portion 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction is provided. It should be noted that a mounting step portion 10a that is recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It is like this.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material having a constant cross-sectional shape (for example, an aluminum alloy), the outer side surfaces thereof are substantially flat surfaces, and the inner side surfaces thereof project inward at the rear end portions. The protrusion 16 having a cavity that penetrates in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. In addition, a plurality of vertically extending grooves are formed on the outer and inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility in a game hall. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger and the design of the appearance can be improved. Note that, for convenience, in some drawings, a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped horizontal piece 17, a plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and extending in the opposite direction to the vertical piece 18. The upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 has a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engaging cutout portion 15. In the present embodiment, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left and right. It is formed in an asymmetrical shape, and the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in bilaterally symmetrical shapes. Has been done.

In this connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is the engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state where the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 while being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13. By screwing into the vertical piece 18, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protrusion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like this. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the lower ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower support fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12 so as to face the upper support metal 20. A support metal fitting 21, a reinforcement metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement metal fitting 22. 23 is provided. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner.

First, the upper support member 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting from the front end of the fixing piece 20a forward of the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projecting piece. A support hook hole 20c formed by cutting out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a side frame on the left side that hangs downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b (FIG. 14A). 14), and a stop hanging part 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 58) of an upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the supporting projection piece 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the supporting projection piece 20b. The details of the supporting projection piece 20b will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side (the right side) on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed to the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing fitting 22 and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped support projection piece 21c projecting from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the front side of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame board 11, and a pin shape protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projection piece 21c. Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 60 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has two closed plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 and arranged to be separated from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are used as hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 83) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal member 22. The guide plate 26 is for guiding the main body frame 3 smoothly when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and is rotated with respect to the support projecting piece 20b by a rivet 28. It is movably supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it moves away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

As shown in FIG. 14(B) and FIG. 15, in this lock member 27, in the state where it is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so as to close the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the front space part of the support hook hole 20c. ..

The support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 has a structure in which the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the tip end side of the stopper portion 27a is formed. Is facing the stop hanging portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and it is not in contact). In a certain normal shaft support state, the center of each of the shaft support pin 633 and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a located at the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending is slanted. They are in a state of facing each other with a deviation in the direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a from the stopper 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. Since the stopper 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, the lock member 27 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. Has become. Further, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the action pin F is applied to the arcuate tip surface 27d in the direction in which the pivot pin 633 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the action force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d), and one side of the shaft support pin 633 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface and the component force F1, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (rotation center of the lock member 27). A moment for rotating the tip end portion from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise direction in the drawing) does not work, and the shaft support pin 633 causes the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to move. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side is maintained. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or the state in which the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and the elastic piece 27c is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) that separates from the support projection piece 20b, one side of the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a Is abutted against the stop hanging portion 20f and does not rotate in the direction of further disengagement, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b.

Even if the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate in shape, the tip end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside where the rotation moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times, and the lock is performed. The present applicant has pointed out that even if the member 27 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

The operation of the lock member 27 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame pivot support fitting 644 (see FIG. 58) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16(A), the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed in, thereby As shown in FIG. 16(B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the pivot pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 16(C). Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out from the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening/closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16(E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b and the operating portion 27b of the lock member 27 is rotated counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to release the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 forming the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light metal (for example, aluminum). Since it is an extruded material of (alloy), when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the pachinko island facility lined up in the game arcade, it is necessary to fix it at a predetermined angle to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails on the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily drive the nails, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily installed on existing pachinko island equipment. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light-weight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, it is possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right width of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 58, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the insides of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. The game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large at the same time that the can be attached to the main body frame 3.

In addition, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the inner frame is tightly attached to the outer frame 2 and the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the outer frame 2 can be assembled with high strength and is sturdy. It is designed so that it can be a rectangular frame. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14 and then the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member that projects outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, an adjacent device when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility in a game hall (not shown) ( For example, it can be attached in close contact with an adjacent ball lending machine or CR unit).

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right side. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the left front side, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the right rear side. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the back.

The door frame 5 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a gaming window 101 in which the outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and the inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as illustrated. The frame base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the left outer periphery, an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, a lower end lower side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 is a door unit 300 that is attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 that is attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and a door that penetrates the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. Attached to the foul cover unit 540, a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. And a glass unit 590 that is operated.

[3-1. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

As shown in the drawing, the door frame base unit 100 has a game frame 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game window 101 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner periphery formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape. 110, an upper bracket 120 attached to the center of the upper part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and a lower end of the game window 101 on the left and right outer sides on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. A pair of side speakers 130 to be mounted and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500, which is mounted on the front lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110, are provided.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower part of the game window 101 with the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction in rear view (open side) ) Disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. Handle relay terminal plate 192 that relays the connection between the main control board 4100 and the main control board 4100, a handle relay terminal plate cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and a firing cover 191 and a handle relay that sandwich the center in the left-right direction. A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 arranged on the side opposite to the terminal board 192 and the like (right side from the center in the left-right direction in rear view (shaft support side)) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 And a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate cover 195 for covering the rear side.

The overall rigidity of the door frame base unit 100 is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. At the same time, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and peripheral controls provided on the game board 4 described later. The amplifier circuit is connected to the board 4140 and amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs the amplified acoustic signal to each speaker 130. Although not specifically shown, in this embodiment, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish units 300, the decoration boards 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 are provided. The wiring for connecting the dial drive motor 414, the switches 432a, 432b, 432c, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, and the like is a frame decoration drive amplifier. When viewed from the rear side of the board 194, they are collectively bundled at the position on the right side (shaft support side) and then extended backward to be connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape, and penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the inner shape is vertically long and substantially elliptical. The game window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, in the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a rectangular cutout 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the pivotal support side (left side in front view). Are formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and the widths of the left and right side sides of the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is approximately the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Therefore, a wider area of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 than the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be easily formed. You can do it.

The door frame base main body 110 is mounted on and fixed to the game window 101, speaker mounting portions 111 for mounting and fixing the side speakers 130, which are arranged on both left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101. To the ball feeding unit 580, the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) for the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. A ball mounting opening 113 for supplying and a handle mounting for mounting the handle bracket 140 which is obliquely inclined so that the right (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion in a front view and bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, a wiring passage opening 115 that penetrates in the front-back direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and has a tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. A lock hole 116 formed and through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted is provided.

As shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle relay terminal plate 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 in a rear view. Located on the lower right side (shaft support side) of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 for mounting the board mounting section 118, and the rear side of the lower end of the game window 101 on the left side (open side) closer to the center than the speaker mounting section 111. The security cover mounting portion 119 for projecting rearward from the disposition and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180, and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side along the inner circumference of the game window 101 on the rear side. A glass unit support step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the unit 590 can abut, and four locks for projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 and for rotatably supporting the glass unit locking member 190. The member mounting part 110b is further provided.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame projecting piece 110c which projects rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is an engaging groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even if an attempt is made, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an enhanced security function. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, many mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the side speaker 130, the handle bracket 140, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

Further, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower dish ball supply port 310g and the foul cover unit 540 of the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the center of the upper front surface of the door frame base body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right brackets attached to the door frame base unit 100 are omitted. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is hidden, and the left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. Further, the upper bracket 120 is designed such that a part of its tip is inserted into the upper decoration unit 280, and the upper decoration unit 280 can be supported from the upper side when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is like this.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 have an intersection point of their central axes in a front view at a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 (for example, 0.2 m to 1). 0.5 m) is obliquely fixed so that a player sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can receive sound most efficiently. In addition, the side speaker 130 is mainly configured to output a sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position separated from the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high sense of stereo.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the right angle direction and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) arranged in the tubular portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The ridge 143 is provided with a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wiring passage port 115 when mounted on the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted into and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 that is inclined, so that the shaft of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward when viewed from the front. The shaft of the handle device 500, which is supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state, is also inclined in a similar manner.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes, as mainly shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 153 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110 It is provided with a lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and these are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in an upper surface and a lower surface thereof on upper and lower ends of a shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155, 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side, so that the door frame 5 is relative to the main body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same width as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protrusion 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) in front view of the edge of the upper long side. , And a vertical bending protrusion 161 which is bent rearward at the center of the upper long side edge and extends vertically. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bending projection piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending projection 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a cutout 162 that substantially corresponds to the cutout 101 a of the door frame base body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open side outward bending protrusions 163 bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154. The opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 is formed so that the opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 extends rearward longer than the opening-side outer bending protrusion 163 as illustrated. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, is provided at the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft-supporting-side protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of its long side and is open to the outside on the shaft-supporting side. Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending protrusions 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the long side thereof.

Since the shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only to the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, When an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, which is illegal. Although it may be easier to perform the action, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted in the U-shape. Can be prevented from being inserted, and only the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent an illegal tool from entering the game board 4. As shown in the drawing, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and has an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 on the upper side thereof. The contact recess 181 is formed, and the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 is provided. Further, at the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projections 183 that project rearward along the end shape. Note that the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the right side (the pivot side) in the rear view is extended rearward longer than the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, a crime prevention front projection 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front projection 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted on the plate. By mounting it on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in the state where the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, the crime prevention front projection 184 is adapted to be fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertical bending protrusion 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, the crime prevention rear projection 182 has a half on the pivot side inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and a half on the open side front. The component member 1110 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool is attempted to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. ..

Note that the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the guide passage for the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the back surface thereof closed with the door frame 5 closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the ball hitting the glass plate 594 that flies or reverses the guide passage portion.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 of the door frame base unit 100 are provided with a fitting portion 190a that is rotatably fitted to a locking member attachment portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a locking screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b with the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 passing through the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a rearward projecting ridge that rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a fingerhold when operating. Note that, of the four glass unit locking members 190, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right when viewed from the rear has no ridge, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing. Further, the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in rear view is provided with an operation piece 190c extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and different from the locking piece 190b. There is. As shown in FIG. 18, the operation piece 190c is covered on the rear side by the security cover 180, so that the operation piece 190c cannot be operated with the security cover 180 attached. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the glass unit 590 from being easily removed by rotating the glass unit locking member 190.

The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle relay terminal plate cover 193 and the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base body 110. It should be noted that when the firing cover 191, the handle relay terminal plate cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[3-2. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. 27A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 27B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit after disassembling it.

As shown, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outer side is linearly formed along with the arc shape. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 forming a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 arranged along an upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side and the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. The side upper cover 208, the side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side decoration frame 202 from the rear side, and the side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210. And are equipped with.

In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the right side decoration. A substrate 214, and a right side lower decorative substrate 216 which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 212 and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted. A right side upper decoration substrate cover 218 which covers the rear side of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decoration substrate 214, and a right side which covers the rear side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216. The right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 216.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 arranged in an upper left portion in a front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to a rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224, an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decorative frame 202, and a side sub-lens 228 attached from the inside to a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208 are provided. There is. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 is arranged, and the LED 214c is designed to emit light.

In this right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a non-translucent member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decoration lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decoration unit 200 are translucent members. And the side upper cover 208 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub-lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

Although not shown in detail, the rear surfaces of the substantially transparent side lens 210 and upper speaker cover 226 and the front surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedron shape. , Is capable of irregularly refracting light. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 are used as games. It cannot be clearly seen from the person's side. Further, the front surfaces of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 are white, and the right side decoration unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. The decoration boards 214, 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control board 4140, respectively, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 4140. , 216b are made to emit light as appropriate so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 is entirely formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, and specifically, an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game window 101. The inner frame 202a and the inner frame 202a are arranged at positions separated from the inner frame 202a to the outside and are linear along the side surface outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part, and the following upper part is the inner frame. An outer frame 202b that is formed in an arc shape so as to curve toward the upper edge of 202a, an upper frame 202c that connects the upper edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, and lower ends of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a. The lower end frame 202d that connects the edges to each other and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b are arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in the present embodiment) along the circumferential direction to connect the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b and to a predetermined value. And a partition wall frame 202f having a slit 202e having a width.

The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width. On the other hand, in the outer frame 202b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is linearly formed at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape so that both ends thereof project forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion of the outer frame 202b above the linearly vertically extending portion is formed in an arcuate shape that is also curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper edge side projects forward. The partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b projects most forward. The partition wall frame 202f is arranged on the radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 with the door frame 5 assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 has a configuration in which a space between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b is divided into a plurality of pieces in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition wall frames 202f, and each of the divided pieces is divided. Is an emission decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210 described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition frame 202f from the rear side. Furthermore, the partition frame 202f can partition the slit 202e and the light-emission decoration opening 202g so that the respective light-emission modes can be made different.

As shown in the drawing, the upper side decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and also has a rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. This side upper decorative member 204 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in a row.

On the other hand, the side upper decoration lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decoration member 204, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decoration member 204 through the opening 204a to the vicinity of its front end. It is provided with a plurality of light guide portions 206a that can project. The tip of the light guide portion 206a is formed in a polyhedron shape, and by inserting the light guide portion 206a into the opening portion 204a of the side upper decoration member 204, it is possible to make it look like a jewel is being fitted into the opening portion 204a. You can do it. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 arranged on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 206 can be emitted forward (on the player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. At the same time, the tip of the light guide portion 206a can be made to shine as a jewel.

The upper side surface and the right side surface (in a front view) of the side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 have a shape substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and the lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decoration member 204. The side upper cover 208 has a mounting step portion 208a which is open downward and is recessed rearward so that the side upper decoration member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front surface. Mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 and the like are formed on the end faces. Further, on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, two notches 208b arranged vertically are formed, so that the side sub-lens 228 mounted inside through the notches 208b can be seen to the front side. Has become. By fitting the side sub-lens 228 into the cutout portion 208b of the side upper cover 208, it is possible to emit light in a different manner only in this portion.

The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape that is substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emission decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 later. The peripheral lens part 210a and the radiation lens part 210b to be inserted into the slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include a peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. The storage step portion 210c has been formed. An upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like, which will be described later, are housed in the housing step 210c. The side lens 210 also includes a mounting portion 210d that forms the upper surface of the storage step portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 208a of the side upper cover 208.

The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side such that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens section 210a and the radiation lens section 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202. Although not shown in detail, the back surface (inner surface) side of the circumferential lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the circumferential lens portion 210a has an uneven plate thickness. As a result, the light passing through the peripheral lens section 210a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron allows the peripheral lens portion 210a to have a characteristic appearance with a glitter.

The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and as shown in the figure, corresponds to a portion of the side lens 210 where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are formed. Is formed in such a manner that the rear surface is depressed, and the main body 212a is continuous with the rear end of the main body 212a and protrudes forward of the main body 212a, and corresponds to the radiation lens 210b (slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202). And a plate-shaped light guide portion 212b arranged at the above position. The main body 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed such that the front surface thereof is a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although not shown in detail, one surface of the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 has a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. Since the plate portion of the main body 212a is formed unevenly, the light passing through the main body 212a is irregularly refracted.

By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be doubly refracted, and the shape of the object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. Almost unrecognizable. Further, due to irregular refraction and irregular reflection due to a polyhedron shape, the side lens 210 (peripheral lens portion 210a) can be made to look glittering and the perspective can be made to appear unclear and mysterious.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right side decoration unit 200 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof, and the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 (the circumference of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at the positions corresponding to the lens part 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°), and are used for the slits 202e of the side decoration frame 202 (of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portion 210b) have relatively small irradiation angles (for example, 15° to 60°). The LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 that decorates the side sub-lens 228 with light emission is a red LED in the present embodiment.

Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. There is. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 is provided with a cylindrical horn portion 224a that projects obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when viewed from the front. Then, the upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper speaker back side of the horn portion 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in a front view. Has become.

The upper right speaker 222 is adapted to be emitted toward the player below from the upper portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the horn portion 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, which causes noise to other pachinko gaming machines. It's becoming difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. Is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is nonuniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted.

The upper speaker cover 226 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. In addition, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that the sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. Is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness thereof is not uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted. Therefore, light is irregularly refracted in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226. The outer appearance of the side lens 210 can be the same as that of the peripheral lens portion 210a.

[3-3. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. 30(A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit after disassembling it.

As illustrated, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the left half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in a front view, and the inside is the game window 101. The outer side is formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100 in a straight line shape, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 is different from the side decoration frame 242 forming the skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, the side upper decoration member 244 arranged along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and the side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side and the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 248, and is fitted and fixed to the side frame decoration 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250. And are equipped with.

In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below substantially from the center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) are mounted. A left side upper decoration board cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decoration board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decoration board 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decoration board 256. The left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 is attached to the side lens 250 and the side decorative frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 arranged in an upper right portion in a front view of the side decoration frame 242 and an upper portion that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to a rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 242. The speaker bracket 264 is provided with an upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decoration frame 242.

In this left side decoration unit 240, a side decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration member 244, a left side upper decoration board cover 258, and a left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a non-translucent member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decoration member 244. Further, the side upper decoration lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decoration unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The side upper cover 248 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

Although not shown in detail, the rear surfaces of the substantially transparent side lenses 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 and the front surfaces of the side inner lenses 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. , Is capable of irregularly refracting light. Therefore, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 are used for playing games. It cannot be clearly seen from the person's side. Further, the front surfaces of the left-side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left-side lower decoration substrate 256 are white, and the left-side decoration unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b. In addition, the decoration boards 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control substrate 4140, respectively, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control substrate 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting.

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 is entirely formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, and specifically, an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game window 101. The inner frame 242a and the inner frame 242a are arranged at positions spaced apart from the inner frame 242a to the outside, and are linear along the side surface outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part, and the following upper part is the inner frame. An outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to curve toward the upper edge of 242a, an upper frame 242c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, and lower ends of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a. The lower end frame 242d that connects the edges to each other, and the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b are arranged at a plurality of positions (four positions in the present embodiment) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. A partition wall frame 242f having a slit 242e having a width.

The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width. On the other hand, in the outer frame 242b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is linearly formed at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, while the front end is vertically movable. Are formed in an arc shape so that both ends thereof project forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion of the outer frame 242b above the linearly extending vertically is formed in an arcuate shape that is also curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper edge side projects forward. Further, the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b projects most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 has a configuration in which a space between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition frame 242f, and each of the divided portions is divided. Is an emission decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of a side lens 250 described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the partition wall frame 242f can partition the slit 242e and the light emission decoration opening 242g, so that the respective light emission modes can be made different.

As shown in the figure, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arcuately extending upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242, and also has a rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decoration member 244 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in a row.

On the other hand, the side upper decoration lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decoration member 244, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decoration member 244 through the opening 244a to the vicinity of the front end thereof. It is provided with a plurality of light guide portions 246a that can project. The tip of the light guide portion 246a is formed in a polyhedron shape, and by inserting the light guide portion 246a into the opening portion 244a of the side upper decoration member 244, it is possible to make it look like a jewel is being fitted into the opening portion 244a. You can do it. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 arranged on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 can be emitted forward (on the player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. At the same time, the tip of the light guide portion 246a can be made to shine as a jewel.

The side upper cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a top surface and a left side surface (in a front view) that are substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along with the side upper decoration member 244. The side upper cover 248 has a mounting step portion 248a that is open downward and is recessed rearward so that the side upper decoration member 244 can be housed in the lower front surface. Mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the side upper decorative members 244 and the like are formed on the end faces. Further, the side upper cover 248 is provided with a covering portion 248b for covering the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the front side on the outer side surface (the left side surface in front view).

The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape that is substantially along with the side decoration frame 242 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emission decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 later. The peripheral lens part 250a and the radiation lens part 250b to be inserted into the slit 242e of the side decoration frame 242 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 242g that is in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. The storage step portion 250c has been formed. An upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, etc., which will be described later, are housed in the housing step 250c. The side lens 250 also includes a mounting portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the housing step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 248a of the side upper cover 248.

The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side such that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens section 250a and the radiation lens section 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242. Although not shown in detail, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has an uneven plate thickness. As a result, the light passing through the peripheral lens section 250a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron allows the peripheral lens portion 250a to exhibit a glittering characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the inside of the side lens 250 from the rear side, and as shown in the drawing, corresponds to a portion of the side lens 250 where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiation lens portion 250b are formed. The main body portion 252a having a recessed rear surface is continuous with the rear end of the main body portion 252a and protrudes forward of the main body portion 252a, and corresponds to the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242). And a plate-shaped light guide portion 252b arranged at the above position. The body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface of the body portion 252 a is a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Although not shown in detail, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 has a polyhedral shape with a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. Since the plate thickness of the main body 252a is not uniform, the light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted.

By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be double-diffracted, and the shape of the object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. Almost unrecognizable. Further, due to the irregular reflection and the polyhedral diffuse reflection, the side lens 250 (peripheral lens portion 250a) can have a glittering appearance, and the perspective can be made to look strange and mysterious.

The left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof, and the light emitting decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 (the circumference of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens part 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°), and the slits 242e of the side decoration frame 242 (of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens section 250b) are those having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°).

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-high range similarly to the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that projects obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when viewed from the front. Then, the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper speaker rear side of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in a front view. Has become.

The left upper speaker 262 is adapted to be emitted from the upper portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the player below by the horn portion 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, which causes noise to other pachinko gaming machines. It's becoming difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces that face different directions, like the peripheral lens section 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body section 252a of the side inner lens 252. Is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is nonuniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted.

An upper speaker cover 266 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 242 so as to close the light emission decoration opening 242g that is in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. In addition, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that the sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens section 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body section 252a of the side inner lens 252. Is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is nonuniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, light is irregularly refracted, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266. The outer appearance of the side lens 250 can be the same as that of the peripheral lens portion 250a.

[3-4. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36. 33 is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and has the upper end edges on the center side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has a generally outer isosceles triangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and has a central opening 281a that greatly penetrates the center and both left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decoration member 281 having a pair of side openings 281b into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the center opening 281a, and a rear side inside the center opening 281a of the front decoration member 281. The central lens 282 fitted from above, the inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, the pair of side lenses 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 from the rear side, and the outer shape in front view are A main body member 285 that has a shape similar to that of the front decoration member 281 and is attached to the rear side of the front decoration member 281 so as to sandwich the central lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 with the front decoration member 281; An upper decorative substrate 286 arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285 and having a plurality of color LEDs 286a, 286b mounted on the front surface, and an outer shape in a front view having substantially the same shape as the main body portion so as to cover the upper decorative substrate 286 from the rear side. And a substrate cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285.

Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is bent backward so as to be continuous from the lower end of the front decoration member 281, extends rearward, and has an upper front end supported by the front decoration member 281 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100. A lower surface decoration member 288 having a pair of lower opening portions 288a penetrating toward each other, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening portion 288a of the lower surface decoration member 288 from above and fixed to the lower surface decoration member 288 and the substrate cover 287. , Are equipped. In the present embodiment, the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288 are provided with plating layers having metallic luster on their surfaces. The LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is arranged at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289, and the central lens 282 and the side lens The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, in the present embodiment, the LED 286a is a full-color LED and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

In the front decoration member 281 in the upper decoration unit 280, the inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a is such that the center upper end is a side extending leftward and rightward, the center lower end is a vertex, and each side is extending in a loose arc shape in a front view. It is formed in a variable pentagonal shape and has three projecting portions that extend into the central opening 281a from the approximate center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the lower end apex. Further, the front decoration member 281 is formed with a plurality of streak lines that extend obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening section 281a. Due to this streak, the front decoration member 281 is cut from the central opening section 281a. The blade is formed in a shape that extends, and a side opening 281b is formed so as to be along the scribing.

The outer shape of the central lens 282 fitted in the central opening 281a of the front decoration member 281 is substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and the front lens is bulged forward. Are formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The central lens 282 is made of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decoration member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel that has been cut with a trillian, and the front decoration member 281 looks like a pedestal of the jewelry. ..

The inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is made of a transparent resin so as to close the rear side opening of the central lens 282, and has a fine lens (or prism) on the surface. A plurality of them are formed so that the light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be widely diffused to the side of the central lens 282. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. Has been done. A plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284 similarly to the inner lens 283, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decoration substrate 286. It can emit light.

The inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of white turbidity due to a plurality of fine lenses formed on the surface, so that the rear side cannot be clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. Has become.

The main body member 285 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a contour that substantially follows the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decoration member 281 and extends cylindrically in the front-rear direction, and the front end opening is inclined obliquely downward and is closed at the rear end. Is inclined obliquely upward, a rear end that is arranged and closed on both sides of the central portion 285a is located at substantially the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a, 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286 and penetrating the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portions 285b. ing. When the upper decoration substrate 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decoration substrate 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central portion 285a and the side portions 285b of the main body member 285 have a shape recessed from the front side to the rear side so that the lights from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b do not laterally affect.

Further, the lower surface decoration member 288 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear side, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. The shape of the end portion of the upper speaker cover 226 near the upper end frames 202c and 242c of the upper speaker covers 226 and 266 is fixed. ing. Note that the lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. In addition, the lower lens 289 is supplied with light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the left side upper decoration substrate 254 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It emits light.

[3-5. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. Is to be placed between. The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover body 291 having a disk-like shape and a plurality of holes that are curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and the outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 that has an annular opening that is formed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the lower plate of the plate unit 300 that is arranged below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328.

In this side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a milky white translucent member similar to the lower plate cover 328 of the plate unit 300 described later. The side speaker cover 290 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-6. Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled as seen from the rear.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the plate unit 300 includes a plate unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction, and a substantially central front surface of the plate unit base 310. The upper plate body 312 is fixed to the upper plate and the rear plate are opened, and the plate-shaped upper plate body 312 has a large bulge forward on the left side (shaft support side) in front view. A front part of the upper plate having a curved upper plate 314 whose center is projected forward, and a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction. A left-right pair having a decorative member 316 and a plurality of light guide portions 318a arranged between the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and fitted in the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper lens 318 are disposed on the opposite sides of the upper plate upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314, and a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a are mounted on the upper surface. The upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322, and the light from the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322, which are arranged between the upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper panel 314. And an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the light to the upper plate upper lens 318 side.

Further, in the plate unit 300, the upper plate body 312 is fixed to the front face of the plate unit base 310 below the upper plate body 312, and the upper and the rear are opened, and the center in the left-right direction is bulged forward when viewed from the front, and the front end is moved to the center in the left-right direction. The dish-shaped lower tray body 324 is formed so as to become lower as it goes, and the center in the left-right direction fixed to the upper portion of the lower tray body 324 is bulged forward in the same manner as the lower tray body 324 and the front end is in the left-right direction. A lower plate having a plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to increase toward the center and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate body 324 and covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a. A cover 328, a plate side middle cover 330 arranged on both left and right sides of the lower plate cover 328 and having openings 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a plate side middle cover fitted into the opening 330a of the plate side middle cover 330 from the rear side. A lens 332 and a dish side outer cover 334 arranged on both left and right sides of the dish side middle cover 330 and extending in the left and right direction to positions corresponding to both left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100 are provided. In addition, the dish side middle cover 330 arranged on the right side in front view has a lock hole 330b formed at a right end portion thereof, which a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later faces. Further, the dish side outer cover 334 on the right side in front view is formed with a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

Further, in the dish unit 300, an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 for pulling out game balls stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and attached to the lower surface, and the plate unit base 310, which is attached to the upper left side in a front view, is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a ball rental unit 360 for operating a CR unit (not shown).

The dish unit 300 comprises a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like to form an upper dish 301 capable of storing game balls. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate body 324, the lower plate top plate 326, the lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 39, the dish unit base 310 of this dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper edge extending in the left-right direction. It is equipped. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in a front view) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and an upper dish ball supply port 310c penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an upper dish ball supply. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the up-down direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction below the vicinity of the right end of the decorative portion 310a below the port 310c (generally in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and an upper plate. A pair of lower tray support portions 310e are provided immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper dish ball supply port 310c, project forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support portion 310e arranged immediately below.

Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between a pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326 to form a horizontally elongated rectangular ring in front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a lower tray bowl supply port 310g having a rectangular shape which is arranged in a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and which penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 40, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It has a notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball can pass.

The upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the cutouts 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is adapted to communicate with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540. Since it is impossible to linearly exit from the upper plate ball supply port 310c into the upper plate 301 in the front, the payout game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and the ball is transferred. The moving direction is changed, and it is guided so as to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right when viewed from the front, and discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Becomes As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even if it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed when the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself to the operation of driving the game ball and the game with the game ball that has been driven, and suppressing the decrease in interest in the game, and increasing the amount of storage of the game ball in the upper plate 301. You can do it.

The upper bowl discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper bowl removal base 344 of the upper bowl removal mechanism 340 and a ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the through. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that is widened to the left in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply is performed by this enlarged portion 310k. The front end of the mouth 310g is widened in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of early ball clogging in the lower dish ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower dish 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and thus more games The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivotal support side) from the center in the front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. In the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312, the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls, which are formed near the intermediate position in the vertical direction, respectively, are supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that can contact the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, this upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (earthed), so that the static electricity charged in the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is installed and through which the upper plate ball removing button 341 is installed. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end, which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate body 312, and a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. An operation unit attachment portion 314c for attaching an operation unit 400 described later, which is formed in a step shape further lower than the decorative attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side of the dish body 312, is provided.

Although detailed description is omitted, the decorative mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 which are attached to the lower surface. The operation unit mounting portion 314c is formed with an opening or the like through which a wiring cable that connects the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control board 4140 can pass, as well as an opening or a notch that penetrates in the direction. ..

The upper plate front portion decoration member 316 has a shape that extends in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314, and a light guide unit of the upper plate upper lens 318 from below into a plurality of openings 316a. The upper plate 318a is fitted, and the upper plate lens 318 can be clamped by the upper plate 314 of the upper plate by attaching it to the decorative mounting portion 314b of the upper plate 314 of the upper plate. Further, below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on the surface is arranged, and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are arranged. The light from the above is sufficiently diffused so that the entire upper plate upper lens 318 can be substantially uniformly illuminated and decorated. As shown in the drawing, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the opening 316a has the same shape. By fitting the light guide portion 318a into the shape, the outer appearance of the upper plate front decorative member 316 looks like a pair-shaped cut jewel. ..

The bottom plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan shape that extends forward in a plan view, has a rear end formed in a straight line in the left-right direction, and has an upper surface having a substantially lower center, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from a front end and a side end other than the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and at the side of the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plates 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by the opening/closing shutter 352 of the lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The outer shape of the lower plate cover 328 is bulged downward in a front view and each side is formed in an inverted triangular shape with an arc, and has an opening 328a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328a is the same as the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. Further, the lower plate cover 328 is formed of a translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals on the back side, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

The dish side middle cover 330 is disposed on both left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along the lower side of the lower dish cover 328 from the substantially center in the left-right direction to the side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end extending in the width and extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 has an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, in the dish side middle cover 330 on the right side (open side) in front view, a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near the outer end (right side end) thereof. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 330b.

The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from the lower portion of the front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is like this. The bottom plate portion 330c of the dish side middle cover 330 covers a part of the lower side of the lower dish body 324.

The dish side outer cover 334 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 in a front view, and has a substantially triangular shape along a side side and a bottom side of the door frame 5 in a front view, and is opened rearward and upward. It is formed in a box shape. In the present embodiment, a handle insertion hole 334a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right side (open side) dish side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and a part of the dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the dish side outer cover 334 and the dish side middle cover 330 cover the lower side of the lower dish body 324 excluding the central portion.

The upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl ball removing button 341 which is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper tray upper panel 314 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and an operation of the upper bowl ball removing button 341. And the operating piece 342 which is moved up and down by a greater amount than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310, and the up and down movement of the operating piece 342 causes it to slide in the up-and-down direction and slides in a ball feeding unit 580 described later. Of the ball removing member 583, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the plate unit base 310, and the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slidable in the vertical direction. An upper plate ball removing base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 includes an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the upper bowl ball removing base 344.

The upper plate ball removing base 344 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharging port 310d of the plate unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper plate ball discharging port 310d and opens toward the front 344a (Fig. 39), and a ball guide flow path 344b that guides the game sphere that communicates with the opening 344a on the back surface side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344 and that has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides it backward (FIG. 38 and FIG. 38). 40), and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, and then extends toward the right side (shaft support side) end in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344. It is provided with a ball removing channel 344c through which a game ball can be distributed.

In the upper dish ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the sphere guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a has a sphere of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. Can be supplied to.

Further, the ball removal channel 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 communicates with the ball removal port 581b of the ball delivery unit 580 through the ball delivery opening 113 of the door frame base body 110, with the upper end adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivotal side is in communication with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply trough 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 is connected. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by an upper plate ball removing channel cover 345.

In this upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball removing button 341 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also formed. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. By moving, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding flow path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball removal port 581b to the ball removal channel 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Note that the ball punching member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the abutting piece 343a of the upper dish ball punching slider 343, whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring. Even if the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition part 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 through the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like are provided. It is possible to prevent damage and also to prevent the game ball from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

The lower dish ball punching mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball punching base 351 arranged between the bottom plate portions 330c of the dish side middle covers 330 arranged below the lower dish body 324 on the left and right in a front view. A plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 352 that is pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removal base 351 and that can open and close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324; A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 are provided.

This lower dish ball removal base 351 is provided with a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating vertically in a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324. Further, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and a shutter ball removing hole which is disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and which can substantially match the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and which penetrates in the up-down direction. And a closing portion 352a is urged by a coil spring between the closing portion 352a and the lower dish ball removing base 351 to a position to close the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a.

Although not shown in detail, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes an abutment pin capable of abutting the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the abutment pin abuts the lower dish ball removal slider 353. , The closing plate 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slider 353 so as to move rearward, or the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. You can do it.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right dish side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the left-right direction of the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300. The surface shape is smoothly continuous with the surface shapes of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330.

Further, in the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, when the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening/closing shutter 352 is substantially aligned with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball pulling slider 353 in a predetermined position in order to hold it in the moving position.

This lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Therefore, the lower tray main body 324 lower tray ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening/closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removing button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower plate ball removing button 354 and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slides rearward to open and close. The shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring.

Then, as the open/close shutter 352 is rotated rearward, the shutter ball removal hole 352b comes to overlap the lower plate ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower plate ball removal hole. Matching with 324b, the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removing slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower mechanism ball removing slider 353 holds the slide by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removing button 354 is moved backward and remains open, and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is opened. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is held in a state of being matched with the extraction hole 3324b.

On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the retracted and opened state is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the holding of the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the lower plate is removed. The ball-sliding slider 353 is slidable, and the opening/closing shutter 352 in which the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in the direction of closing the lower tray ball-hole 324b is moved by the urging force so that the closing portion 352a is closed. It rotates in the direction of moving to the direction (front) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the open/close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removing slider 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 moves down. It is possible to return to the closed position that substantially coincides with the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like, and store the game balls in the lower plate 302.

It should be noted that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed rearward, and a loan remaining display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining number display 365c can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display unit 363. The ball lending switch 365a, the return switch 365b, and the remaining count display 365c are mounted on the count display plate 365, and the count display plate 365 is attached inside the ball rental unit 360. In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in a dish unit. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper tray 301 of 300, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the balance of the loan will be returned. ing. In addition, the remaining balance display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and which mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivotal support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

[3-7. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. 41 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit disassembled and seen from the upper right front side, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled operation unit seen from the lower right front side. Further, FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view showing the pressing operation section of the operation unit in a pressed state.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at approximately the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and the pressure that can be pressed by the player. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and not only the operation of driving the game ball into the player, , It is also possible to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that fixes the drive gear 412 to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 slidably in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation portion 405 disposed inside the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. A base member having a spring 418 biased upward, an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. 420, an upper cover 422 that has an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 to pass through, and a base member 420 that is attached below the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420. Mainly includes a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surfaces of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the driven gear 410 is twice the number of teeth of the drive gear 412, that is, the reduction ratio is set to the value 2. Therefore, the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is When it makes two revolutions, the driven gear 410 that meshes with the drive gear 412 makes one revolution. The dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor, and its output shaft rotates 15° in one step and 360° in 24 steps. For this reason, when the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 rotates by 15° in one step, the drive gear 412 fixed to this output shaft also rotates by 15°, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410, and the reduction ratio has a value of 2. As a result, the dial operation unit 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates 30° together with the driven gear 410.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and an opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attachment portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. Dial support board 430 having an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted on the upper surface at a position corresponding to the ring of the dial operation portion 401. And a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 for detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, a press detection switch 432c for detecting operation of the press operation unit 405, and a press operation unit 405. And a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below.

The dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a light-transmissive material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and a surface extending outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder portion 401a. A ring-shaped top plate portion 401b on which a predetermined decoration (specifically, a design having smooth unevenness is applied) is provided, and a cylindrical shape extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b. An outer cylinder part 401c shorter than the delivery inner cylinder part 401a and a collar part 401d extending outward from the lower end of the outer cylinder part 401c in an annular shape are mainly provided. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a coupling locking portion (see FIG. 44) at the lower end of the inner tubular portion 401a, and the coupling locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, so that the dial operating portion The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other. Furthermore, the dial operation portion 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylindrical portion 401a. The protrusion 401f can come into contact with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, the details of which will be described later. By abutting against the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 46).

Note that, as shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The inclined surface is formed so that the contact area becomes large when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation section 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation section 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation section 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation section 405 side. It has become.

The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 that is arranged inside 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is applied to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is like this.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower outer periphery and projecting outward at the lower end in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By locking with the locking projection 416g (see FIG. 45 and FIG. 46) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button holding cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (depressing operation portion 405) does not rotate inside the button support cylinder 416b. It should be noted that a gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to move at a predetermined angle. It is possible to rotate within the range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c extending downward from a position different from the lower part of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and detected by the pressing detection switch 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection switch 432c when the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter below the substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than that on the upper side, and a step portion 407a is formed between the upper side and the lower side. Are formed. In the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405), the lower side of the step portion 407a is smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the upper side of the step portion 407a is the dial operation portion. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. Thus, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operating portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 46).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character "Push" is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has a lower surface on which an annular slide contacting the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 is made. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the facing positions of the upper ends and project inward, and these connecting locking claws 410b are included in the dial operation portion 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation part 401 are integrally rotatably connected by being locked with the connection locking part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are adapted to be detected by a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432, and the details of the rotation detection pieces 410c will be described later. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In the present embodiment, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to rotate integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 drives the drive gear 412 to rotate via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, by rotating the dial drive motor 414 to rotate the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) in the forward direction and in the reverse direction alternately in small increments, the dial operation portion 401 is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. Since rotation and rotation can be alternately repeated in small steps, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time for each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b and the like. It is possible to add a feeling.

Further, the operation portion holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 that projects cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. A button support cylinder 416b that supports the button slidably in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416g that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and that can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 45 and 46), and a through hole 416c for sending light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the bottom center of the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation portion 405). An opening 416d through which the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 pass vertically through the bottom outside the button support cylinder 416b, and the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b passes vertically. An opening 416e through which the press detection switch 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 faces from the upper side, and a pair of board holding claws 416f extending downward from the lower surface to hold the button decoration board 432. I have it.

Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406, and locks it. It further includes a plurality of contact portions that can contact the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button body 406 from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 has a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, and the like at appropriate positions. Is equipped with.

The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be rotatably supported. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. .. A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy so that the operation unit 400 is unlikely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower recess 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation unit holding member 416 can be fitted, and a bottom portion (ceiling part) of the lower recess 420b, and vertically extends through the operation unit holding member 416. An inner opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recessed portion 420c which is arranged on the opposite side of the lower recessed portion 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and which is recessed downward at least to accommodate the driven gear 410, Equipped with. In addition, as shown in FIG. 44, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f opening downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e are provided.

In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper concave portion 420c and a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g, which are different from the outside of the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430 protruding to the bottom. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses for mounting the respective members, mounting holes, etc. at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower recess portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass through the opening 420a at the center. The operation portion holding member 416 can be supported by screwing the above into the operation portion holding member 416 through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base member 420 has the upper end of the gear rail 416a slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation member holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can be slidably rotated in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof that fits with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424, which will be described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. The board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 in the surface by mounting the dial drive motor 414 on the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass, on its top plate. ing. In a plan view, the upper cover 422 has a direction (left-right direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1) that connects the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412). It is formed so as to extend long, and has engaging claws 422b projecting downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The upper cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) in the minor axis direction (front-back direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and has a claw-shaped locking with a lower end protruding outward. A piece 422c is provided. The locking piece 422c can be locked with the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c with the upper plate front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off from the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

In the upper cover 422, with the operation member holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial operation member 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, the dial operation member 401 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a. By covering the upper portion of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation portion 401 from coming off upward.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially matching the outer periphery of the upper cover 422, and the leg portion of the base member 420 is located at a predetermined position on the bottom top surface. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that are engageable with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper ends of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claw 422b with.

As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that penetrates the center in the vertical direction and allows the dial operation portion 401 (excluding the collar portion 401d) to pass through, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. ..

The operation unit 400 is adapted to be attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, in the state where it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, The lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached so that the lower surface thereof is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm), and the operation unit 400 is pressed. The cover body 426 is elastically deformed when hit or hit, so that the impact can be alleviated.

In the operation unit 400, with the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attaching portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the cover body 426 is attached. The structure is such that a surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation portion 401 has the circumferential length of the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 have a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 that is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that. Thereby, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between the detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and each rotation. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the detection switches 432a and 432b.

Further, although the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment will be described in detail later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. There is. In addition, the operation unit 400 gradually rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in reverse.

In addition, in the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button operation is performed. Since the cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation portion 405 is not applied to the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the dial operation section 401 side through the press operation section 405 (operation unit 400) so as not to be easily broken.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the dial drive motor 414 is wiggled in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. By alternately repeating the rotation for forward rotation and the rotation for reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 together with the dial operation unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 surprises the player and plays a game. You can entertain the production.

Next, a description will be given of a dial excitation control capable of vibrating the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation of rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation of rotating it in reverse. As described above, the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor, and its output shaft rotates 15° in 1 step and 360° in 24 steps. For this reason, when the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 rotates by 15° in one step, the drive gear 412 fixed to this output shaft also rotates by 15°, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410, and the reduction ratio has a value of 2. As a result, the dial operation unit 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates 30° together with the driven gear 410.

By rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 forward by one step and then reversing it by one step, such a forward rotation and a reverse rotation are alternately repeated. Can be rotated little by little in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions to create a state in which the dial operation unit 401 is as if it were vibrating. Since the surface of the top plate portion 401b of the dial operation portion 401 is provided with a design having smooth unevenness, the dial operation portion 401 can be rotated little by little in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. By touching the top plate portion 401b of the dial operation unit 401 with the player's finger or palm, the smooth unevenness provided on the surface of the top plate portion 401b moves the finger or palm so that vibration is applied. It is also possible to make people feel it.

The dial excitation control for alternately repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is specifically performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 (see FIG. 101). The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 101) of the peripheral control unit 4150 is a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 101) (for example, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command classified into the special figure 1 synchronization effect related command). When receiving a special figure 2 tuning effect start command etc. (see FIG. 119) that is classified as related to special figure 2 tuning effect, (see FIG. 119)), peripheral control of peripheral control unit power-on processing described later based on the received command. In the unit steady process (see step S1009 to step S1038 in FIG. 144), the dial vibration is performed according to the schedule data for alternately repeating the rotation for normally rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 for one step and the rotation for the reverse rotation. Take control. The dial vibration control schedule data defines the start time and the end time of the dial vibration control, and is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 101) of the peripheral control unit 4150. .. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs dial excitation control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (described later) (see step S1104 in FIG. 146).

Next, a rotation direction change control capable of rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction will be described. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is connected to the driven gear 410, and the plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c arranged in a row at a constant interval on the driven gear 410 are detected by the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. The rotation direction is detected based on the detected pattern.

The rotation direction change control changes the rotation direction when the player's finger or palm touches the dial operation unit 401 and the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 stops while the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise. Then, when the dial operation unit 401 is started to rotate counterclockwise or when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise, the player's finger or palm touches the dial operation unit 401 and the dial operation unit 401 When the rotation is stopped, the rotation direction is changed and the dial operation unit 401 is started to rotate clockwise. When the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, the rotation of the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operation unit 401 is also stopped. Therefore, the dial drive motor 414 fixed to the drive gear 412 meshing with the driven gear 410 is stopped. The rotation of the output shaft is also stopped, and the stepping motor dial drive motor 414 is out of step. As described above, in the present embodiment, the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, can be stepped out by the player's will. Therefore, the player touches the dial operation unit 401 with a finger or a palm. It is possible to forcibly stop the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 or change the rotation direction.

Specifically, it is performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 101) of the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 101) of the peripheral control unit 4150 uses a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 101) (for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related commands). When receiving a special figure 2 tuning effect start command etc. (see FIG. 119) classified as related to special figure 2 entrainment effect (see FIG. 119), peripheral control of peripheral control unit power-on processing to be described later based on the received command. In the part steady process (see step S1009 to step S1038 in FIG. 144), the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 to rotate normally and reversely. This rotation direction change control schedule data defines the rotation start timing and rotation end timing of the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 101) of the peripheral control unit 4150. Multiple items are stored. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs a rotation detection switch history creation process (see FIG. 149) executed as one process in the operation unit information acquisition process (see step S1108 of FIG. 146) in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. From the created rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST, is the dial operation unit 401 in a stopped state (in other words, is the dial drive motor 414 out of step). , Whether it is rotating in the clockwise direction or in the counterclockwise direction, and in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing (step S1104 in FIG. 146). Refer to ), and the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data.

For example, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a is currently rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction, the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the clockwise direction from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST. When it is grasped that the dial operation unit 401 is in the state of being rotated, the rotation direction change control is performed in accordance with the schedule data for continuously rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction, while the state of the dial operation unit 401 being stopped (in other words, When it is understood that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step) or is rotating counterclockwise, rotation direction change control is performed according to schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise. ..

Further, when the dial operation unit 401 is currently rotated counterclockwise, the peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST. When it is grasped that the dial operation unit 401 is in a rotating state, the rotation direction change control is continuously performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise, while the dial operation unit 401 is in the stopped state ( In other words, if it is understood that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step) or is rotating clockwise, the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise. To do.

As described above, in both the dial excitation control and the rotation direction change control described above, the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is normally or reversely rotated, but the latter rotation direction change control is performed by the dial operation unit 401. Is executed when an external factor such as the case where the peripheral control MPU4150a is actually rotating in the opposite direction to the intended direction or when the peripheral control MPU4150a is stopped, whereas the former dial vibration control is performed. Is completely different in that the period for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 in the normal direction or the reverse direction is set and executed regardless of the occurrence of an external factor.

In the rotation direction change control, when it is understood that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is suddenly changed to the reverse rotation direction, whereas the dial vibration control is performed. Since there is a difference in vibrating the dial operation unit 401, the rotation direction change control provides the same sense of effect as the effect of using the dial operation unit 401 created by the dial vibration control. It can be created using the dial operation unit 401.

Next, the click generation control that can give a click feeling to the rotating operation of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. Since the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor as described above, it is possible to generate static torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 by maintaining the energized state (excited state) of a specific phase of the stepping motor. You can Here, in the present embodiment, the first stationary torque generation state in which the excitation state is maintained for the specific one phase to generate the stationary torque, and the excitation state is maintained in the specific two phases to maintain the stationary state. A mechanism that creates a second stationary torque generation state that generates torque is adopted.

In the first stationary torque generation state, when the dial operating portion 401 is rotated beyond the stationary torque in this state, rotation of the dial operating portion 401 is driven by the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412 is fixed to the dial drive. When transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, the output shaft loses step and rotates step by step, that is, it rotates in steps of 15°. .. Even in the second stationary torque generation state, when the dial operating portion 401 is rotated beyond the stationary torque in this state, rotation of the dial operating portion 401 is driven by the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412 is fixed to the dial drive. When transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, the output shaft loses step and rotates step by step, that is, it rotates in steps of 15°. ..

In the second static torque generation state, since the excitation state is maintained for the specific two phases, it is 2 for the first static torque generation state that is maintained for the specific one phase. Double static torque can be obtained. In other words, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the second static torque generation state is transmitted twice as much as the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the first static torque generation state.

The stepping motor is usually controlled so as to prevent step-out so as not to be out of control, but in the present embodiment, the stepping motor is actively controlled so as to prevent step-out. It is possible to obtain a click feeling in the rotating operation of 401, and to generate the click feeling in two stages, so that the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the first static torque generation state can be felt lightly. On the other hand, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the second stationary torque generation state can be made heavy.

The click generation control capable of giving a click feeling to the rotating operation of the dial operation unit 401 is specifically performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 101) of the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 101) of the peripheral control unit 4150 is a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 101) (for example, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command classified into the special figure 1 synchronization effect related command). When receiving a special figure 2 tuning effect start command etc. (see FIG. 119) that is classified as related to special figure 2 tuning effect, (see FIG. 119)), peripheral control of peripheral control unit power-on processing described later based on the received command. In the part steady process (see steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 144), click generation control is performed according to schedule data for generating stationary torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The click generation control schedule data defines the timings for generating and stopping the stationary torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 101). In advance, a plurality of them are stored. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs click generation control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 146).

As described above, the click generation control is executed when the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, whereas the rotation direction change control is executed when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated. It is completely different in that it is one. Further, in the click generation control, there is a click feeling when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated, whereas in the rotation direction change control, the rotation direction is changed by blocking (blocking) the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. Since it is completely different in that it makes a sudden change to the reverse rotation direction, in the click generation control, the same dial operation as the effect of the effect using the dial operation unit 401 created by the rotation direction change control is achieved. It can be created using the unit 401.

Here, torque-free control in which static torque is not applied to the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 will be described. In this torque-free control, all phases of the dial drive motor 414 are in a non-energized state (non-excited state), and the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is torque-free. That is, even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise, no load or click feeling that hinders the operation is generated.

The effect using the torque-free control will be briefly described. For example, an effect screen selected by operating the dial operation unit 401 and being rotated by the dial operation unit 401 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 96). At the same time, by the above-described click generation control, a click feeling is given to the dial operation unit 401, and when the player operates the dial operation unit 401 to rotate it clockwise or counterclockwise, suddenly , The state in which the click generation control is stopped and the torque becomes free, that is, the state shifts to the torque free control, and it can be used for an effect in which the player selects an effect screen not intended (scooping his foot). In other words, in the click generation control, a static torque is generated on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, whereas in the torque-free control, the static torque generated is forcibly released and the player's finger or Since the static torque, which is the load applied to the palm of the palm from the dial operation unit 401, can be suddenly removed, the forcible release of the static torque causes the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 as a slip feeling and the finger or palm of the player. Will be given to.

As described above, the present embodiment is based on a completely new idea that the stepping motor is also used as a man-machine interface in addition to the idea that the stepping motor is used to drive the movable body.

In the present embodiment, although not shown, the peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 101) of the peripheral control board 4140 performs the operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later (see step S1108 in FIG. 146). A state in which the dial operation unit 401 is stopped based on the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST created in the rotation detection switch history creation process (see FIG. 149) executed as one process. , Whether it is rotating clockwise or counterclockwise, the player is irrelevant to the production progress (for example, production and It is possible to monitor the presence/absence of the dial operation unit 401 by linking and operating the dial operation unit 401 (effects other than the effect that prompts the operation). Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 to rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise when it is determined that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm. Alternatively, a behavior of rotating counterclockwise is imparted to rotate the dial operation unit 401 against the rotation direction of the player.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 when it recognizes that the dial operation unit 401 is operated by the player's finger or palm irrespective of the progress of the effect, and the dial operation unit 401 is rotated. The rotation behavior imparting control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the wheel clockwise or counterclockwise. The schedule data of the rotation behavior imparting control defines the rotation direction and the rotation speed for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 101) of the peripheral control unit 4150. Plural items are stored in advance. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the rotational behavior imparting control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 146).

In this way, when the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 recognizes that the dial operation unit 401 is operated by the player's finger or palm irrespective of the progress of the production, the dial drive motor 414 of the dial drive motor 414 is detected. Since the behavior is given to the dial operation unit 401 by the rotation of the output shaft, the dial operation unit 401 suddenly starts to move. In other words, when the player performs a meaningless operation that has nothing to do with the effect on the dial operation unit 401, the pachinko gaming machine 1 responds to this and a behavior is given to the dial operation unit 401. The player behaves as if he/she should be careful not to perform a meaningless operation on the dial operation unit 401. Such a behavior by the dial operation unit 401 can give the player an impression as if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an intention. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game property with the operation member.

[3-8. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame which is disassembled and seen from the rear. As illustrated, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion holes 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis in a round shape; A rotating handle body front 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and integrally rotatable with the rotating handle body rear 504, and a handle base 502 arranged on the front surface of the rotating handle body front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502. A front end cover 508 that rotatably supports the front 506 of the rotating handle body and the rear 504 of the rotating handle body in cooperation with each other.

Further, the handle device 500 has a shaft member 510 having a non-circular bearing part 510a at the rear end, which is attached and fixed to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to project from the front side to the rear side, and the bearing part of the shaft member 510. A potentiometer 512 that has a rotatable detection shaft portion 512a that fits with 510a and is non-rotatably fitted with the front surface of the handle base 502, and the front surface of the handle base 502 so that the potentiometer 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502. Fixed to the switch support member 514 having a through hole 514a through which the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member 514, and a touch switch 516. A firing stop switch 518 attached to different positions on the rear surface, a one-shot button 520 rotatably supported by a switch support member 514 to activate the firing stop switch 518, and a rotation stop arranged to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510. A handle return spring 522 for urging the front handle body 506 and the rotating handle body rear 504 to return them to the original rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength with which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506. Further, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body 504 are rotated from the original rotation position in the clockwise direction in the front view to the limit rotation position (the rotation end in the clockwise direction in the front view). Move.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 has a hemispherical rounded bulging shape on the front end side and a cylindrical shape with an open rear end on the rear end side. In addition, three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the cylindrical outer circumference on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting the handle base 502 into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis of the rotary handle main body 506 is formed, and three mounting bosses 508a protruding rearward are formed on the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 506a in the front 506 of the rotating handle body. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front of the rotary handle main body 506 comes into contact with the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508, thereby restricting the rotation range of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506.

Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b protruding rearward is formed on the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the switch support member 514. The handle return spring 522 causes the rotary handle body 504 to rotate. , 506 are urged to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

The handle device 500 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face the outer side (open side) in a plan view seen from above, so that the handle mounting portion 114 is mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to the door frame 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the turning operation can be performed easily without any discomfort.

Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotating handle bodies 504 and 506 (handle device 500) are rotated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 rotates via the shaft member 510. It will be. Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 described below changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512. , The rotation angle of the rotation handle bodies 504, 506, that is, the game balls are driven into the game area 1100 with a launch strength according to the rotation position of the rotation handle bodies 504, 506.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductive material, and the touch switch 516 detects the contact when the player contacts the rotating handle bodies 504 and 506. It is like this. Then, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 rotate while the touch switch 516 detects contact with the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with a strength according to the rotation, and the game ball You can type in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed.

When the player presses the one-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the one-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654. It is like this. Accordingly, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520 is released, so that the one-shot button 520 before the operation is performed. It is possible to shoot a game ball with the driving strength.

The handle device 500 electrically detects the rotational operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 by the potentiometer 512, and based on the detection of the rotational position from the potentiometer 512, the firing controller 4120 rotationally drives the firing solenoid 654. Since the strength is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided when the door frame 5 is closed, as in the conventional pachinko game machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism that is linked to each other and is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified and the joint can be achieved. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a defect in the unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a defect in the game ball being hit.

[3-9. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front side, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the rear side. Further, FIG. 50 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hitting ball launching device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base 542 having an opening on the front side and having a plurality of flow paths for game balls inside, and a front cover 544 closing a front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 49, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first ball entrance 542a which is disposed in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 which communicates with the first ball entrance. The first sphere passage 542b that spreads to the right when viewed from the front, the second sphere entrance 542c that is arranged outside the first sphere entrance 542a (on the right in the rear view) and is larger than the first sphere entrance 542a, and the second Inside the cover base 542, which communicates with the ball passage 542d, there is provided a second ball inlet 542c which extends downward and is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner in a front view. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 is such that the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is approximately three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball, as shown in the figure. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and is open upward, and can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e and guide the game ball to an upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening/closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening/closing crank 793. The open/close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a and the second ball outlet 544b which is arranged at the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 passes the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b and the plate from the first ball outlet 544a. It can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. It is possible to supply the lower plate 302 to the lower plate 302 from the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g from the plate unit 300.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the game ball shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 from the second ball outlet 544b through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply). ) You can do it.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is pivotally supported on the cover base 542 so as to be swingable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. The swinging member 548, the full tank switch 550 that detects swinging of the swinging member 548, and the spring 552 that biases the swinging member 548 in a direction in which the full swinging switch 550 does not detect the swinging member 548. ing. As shown in FIG. 50, the swing member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported by the cover base 542 and an upper end that is rotatable leftward in front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swing member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank switch 550. .. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming space in which the accommodation space 546 is stored is full.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , Are provided so that static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of the game balls can be removed.

In this embodiment, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even when the upper plate 301 is full, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game balls stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. When the normal passage 773 on the upstream side of is also filled up, the game balls start to flow to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 73), and the full tank branch unit 770. From the full tank outlet 776 of the foul cover unit 540 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the game balls cannot be output from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the second ball passage 542d stays in the accommodation space 546. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a lot of the game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank switch 550, that is, when the storage space 546 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout control board 4110 causes the prize ball unit 700 to play the game balls. The payout is stopped and the player is notified that the game ball in the dish unit 300 is discharged to the outside.

In addition, when the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection switch 548a is not detected by the full tank switch 550. The detection is started, and the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[3-10. Ball feeding unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. 51A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 51B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 52(A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and FIG. 52(B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case removed. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower tray 302 by operating the upper bowl ball removing button 341.

In this ball feeding unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball sending opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and closing the rear end of the front cover 581 and opening the front. Box-shaped, a rear cover 582 having a batting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from an entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the batting ball launching device 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover. A ball removing member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a on the rear side of the front cover 581 to partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b; , Sending the game balls on the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 one by one to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and rotatably supporting the shaft extending vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. And a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Each is arranged.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing port 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing opening 581b below the entrance 581a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 583a is lowered toward the ball sending member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end thereof extends around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotatable rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. And a weight portion 583d that protrudes to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 51), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110. It is configured to come into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. A ball holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is adapted to rotate with respect to the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the ball hitting launching device 650 from the ball hitting supply port 582a, and at the same time, enters the partition part 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball to the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 584a and remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the side of the rod portion 584c closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition part 583a is held in the ball holding part 584b.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved forward and backward by the movement of the ball feeding solenoid 585, which causes the tip to swing vertically, and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 586 which swings vertically. And a ball feeding crank 587 for rotating the ball feeding member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feeding crank 587 includes an engaging portion 587a which is engageable with a vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 587a which engages with the ball feeding operating rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 52) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation in FIG. In this embodiment, a flapper solenoid in which the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

The ball feeding unit 580 transmits the movement of the ball feeding operating rod 586 which is swung by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 which moves forward and backward by the ball feeding operating rod 586 and the ball feeding crank 587 to rotate the ball feeding member 584. It can be moved. It should be noted that when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding actuating rod 586 moves away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 so that the tip end thereof is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 accepts one game ball, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is accepted. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

Further, the slewing member 583, which is rotatably supported in the ball feeding unit 580, has a moment to rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the weight portion 583d, but projects forward. The operating rod 583c comes into contact with the upper end of the abutment piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300, so that the rotation thereof is restricted. Then, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions the space between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 581b side. Then, when the player presses down the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and abuts. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, whereby the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and enters through the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b into the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition 583a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball is It is possible to prevent the partition part 583a from bouncing back.

[3-11. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. This glass unit 590 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 that is formed of synthetic resin and has an opening that is approximately the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. And a transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes four pieces 592a which are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction on the left and right sides and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate which extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and extends downward. Locking piece 592b.

In this glass unit 590, the locking piece 592b at the lower end is locked so as to be engaged with the vertical bending protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the upper rear side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step portion 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stopper 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIGS. 23, 26, etc.).

In this way, the door frame 5 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls lined up and down on the lower side of the vertically long elliptical game window 101. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101, on the right side of the lower plate 302 when viewed from the front. The handle device 500 of FIG. Further, the door frame 5 has the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left and right and the upper side of the game window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. As described above, the dish unit 300 is arranged so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. It has a continuous, continuous appearance.

Further, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, etc. provided in each of the units 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby causing the game window 101. Also, the lower plate cover 328 can be illuminated and decorated with any luminescent color so as to surround the opening 328a. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided on the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs are mounted on the rear side of the emission lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. By turning on or off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256, it is possible to change the mode of light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b. If the mode and the mode of emission are the same (the emission color and the emission pattern are the same), it is possible to provide a substantially uniform emission decoration, and if the emission modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. By doing so, it is possible to make a light-emitting decoration that is discontinuous in the circumferential direction, and if the light-emitting modes are made different so as to emphasize the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, they radiate radially around the center of the game window 101. It can be made to be a light-emitting decoration, which can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, in the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of an aluminum alloy by die casting, and the base member 420 of the dish unit 300 is formed by the cover body 426. Since it is hung from the operation unit mounting portion 314c, when the dial operating portion 401 or the pressing operating portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed so as to bend, and the base member 420 is lowered. Since it comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c via the cover 424, the impact applied to the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, etc. can be alleviated, and the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged. You can do it.

Further, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation portion 401, and the dial operation portion 401 is also included even if the player or the like strongly hits the pressing operation portion 405. Since it is struck by the key, the impact struck by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the concentration of the impact can be prevented and the damage is less likely to occur. Further, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly project from the lower side to the upper surface. When the impact of hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operation portion holding member 416 bends downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the opening 420a made of metal. Since the base member 420 can be brought into contact with the upper surface and the impact can be received by the base member 420, the load on the operation portion holding member 416 can be reduced, and the gear rail 416a can be prevented from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be improved.

Further, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the dish unit 300 from above, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced even if the operation unit 400 is damaged. By replacing the unit 400, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from decreasing.

[3-12. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light emission decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. Further, FIG. 54 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment is a ring-shaped outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed so as to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is equipped with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by making each LED emit light as appropriate, the game window 101 The outer circumference of the can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference except the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens parts 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the emission lens parts 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centering around the lower part of the left and right center of the game window 101. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are formed by the non-translucent (in the present embodiment, a plating layer is provided on the surface) side decoration frames 202 and 242. It is in a state where the outer circumference is surrounded.

Side inner lenses 212, 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210, 250. The side inner lenses 212, 252 have their main bodies 212a, 252a with respect to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a. The light guide portions 212b and 252b are formed so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance and extend to a position as close as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. Has been done. Although not shown in detail in the body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface of the body portions 212a and 252a, and the decorative substrates 214, 216, and 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can diffuse the light.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256, which are arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, have circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a, respectively. The LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged at corresponding positions, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b. In this embodiment, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens sections 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens sections 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper part). The normal brightness is lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decorative substrate 286 in the decorative unit 280. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged above and below corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red LEDs.

In the present embodiment, the surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214, the right-side lower decorative substrate 216, the left-side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk). It is made white by printing), white painting, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b and the like are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and look bad, and by reflecting the light from the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light toward the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated brighter.

Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portions of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, which are oriented toward the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. Is formed so as to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 arranged. The central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the side lenses 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a translucent white (milky white) member. .. As a result, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface thereof and can diffuse and refract light, so that the transparent central lens 282 can be used. Looking at the inner lens 283, the central lens 282 looks deep and the central lens 282 itself seems to be shining. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 arranged on the rear side of the inner lens 283 cannot be seen from the player side.

On the upper decoration substrate 286 of the upper decoration unit 280, a plurality (six in this embodiment) of LEDs 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 and arranged on the rear side of the inner lens 283, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are arranged. A plurality of LEDs 286b (in this embodiment, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, one for the left lens and one for the left lens) are provided on the rear side. In this embodiment, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-intensity white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the plurality of jewel-shaped light guide portions 318a in the upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged along the front end of the upper dish 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200, 240. The front decoration members 316 are arranged in a row in a state of being exposed through the openings 316a, and when viewed from the front, as shown in the drawing, the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper lens 318 form the outside of the lower side of the game window 101. (Lower side) is designed to be decorated. Below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a protrusion corresponding to each light guide 318a is arranged. The upper plate upper lens 318 of the plate unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper plate upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

The upper dish inner lens 319 of the dish unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) of the upper dish lens 318 corresponding to the light guide portion 318a, and diffuses or refracts light. Therefore, like the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is provided with a depth and a glittering brilliance. The light portion 318a looks like a jewel. Further, the upper plate upper inner lens 319 prevents the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 disposed on the lower side from being seen from the player side through the light guide portion 318a.

On the upper surfaces of the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 in this plate unit 300, a plurality (six in this embodiment) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this embodiment, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation portion 401 and a light-transmitting cylindrical pressing operation portion arranged inside the dial operation portion 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are arranged below the dial operation section 401 and the push operation section 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 430b (four in the present embodiment) arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this embodiment, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214a, 216a corresponding to the respective peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101. , 254a, 256a have a first annular group 102 near the game window 101 (in the range of the hatch in FIGS. 53 and 54) and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102 (FIG. 53). And within the range of the crosshatch in FIG. 54), by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, a plurality of substantially concentric circles surrounding the game window 101 ( In the present embodiment, two) light emission decoration can be performed. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the hatched area close to the game window 101 is illuminated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are made to emit light. When all the lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 have the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 102 and the LEDs 214b. It is a radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 53 and 54) that extends radially around the lower left-right center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the two annular groups 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be divided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. Further, the LED 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side of the right side decoration unit 200 is defined as the upper right side group 105, and by making the LED 214c emit light as appropriate, one of the upper right side of the door frame 5 is removed. The portion (side sub lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101, the upper center that light-emits the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is defined as a group 106. By appropriately emitting the LED 286a of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and as a reference point for the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. Further, the LEDs 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 are an upper center side group 107 that lights and decorates both left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 286b of the upper center side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 are illuminated and decorated, and the upper side of the game window 101 (including the upper portion). It is possible to decorate it with V-shaped light.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320a corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316a of the upper plate front decoration member 316 in the plate unit 300 for decorating the lower side of the game window 101. , 322a is a lower group 108 that light-emits the outer periphery of the lower side of the game window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the game window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be illuminated and decorated, and also the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. , 216a, 254a, 256a, the entire outer circumference of the game window 101 can be illuminated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the center of the upper part of the dish unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 are the operation units 400. The operation unit group 109 is used to perform light emission decoration. By appropriately causing the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109 to emit light, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be determined. The player can be notified.

The light emission decoration of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be further described in detail. , 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they belong, according to the control system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a-102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been.

Further, the twenty LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the radial lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the twelve LEDs 320a, 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems, 108a to 108d, three from the right side in front view. In addition, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation unit group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401, which are diagonally arranged with the pressing operation unit 405 sandwiched therebetween, as a set, and the left and right 109a and front and rear 109a. 109b is divided into two systems, and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent systems of RGB for full-color light emission, and in actual light emission control, It doubles to 84 lines. Further, the LEDs 286b, 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a, 109b to which the LEDs 286b, 430b belong require a large amount of current in order to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected to each, and the number of systems is doubled in the actual light emission control to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b formed by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, so that the same number of systems is used for the actual light emission control, that is, ten systems.

Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. As a result, it is possible to produce a luminescent effect with a rich expression.

As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first annular group 102 is sequentially emitted to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitted in the same color or similar colors) to spread outward with the game window 101 as the center. Luminous effect, or conversely, luminous effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequentially emitting the same color or similar colors), Alternatively, by making the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect in which the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 is made to emit light widely.

Further, by coordinating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4, the front unit 2000, etc., the LED of the game board 4 and the LED of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101. With the LED of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it becomes possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, light is circulated around the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting light from each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 108a to 108d. Such a light emitting effect, light moves toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101, or light from the central lens 282 extends along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to give a moving light effect. In the present embodiment, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, if it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to favorably perform a light emission effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Furthermore, by making only the radial groups 104 emit light, a light emission effect of radially emitting light around the game window 101 is made, or at the same time as the radial groups 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted. By doing so, a light emission effect of causing the entire periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or by causing the radial group 104 to emit light (lighting/blinking) while the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are emitting light It is possible to give a luminous effect by giving an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by making each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 individually emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the radial lens units 210b and 250b circulate.

Further, by causing the systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106 to emit light at the same time, the entire central lens 282 emits light, and by sequentially emitting the systems 106a to 106c, light is rotated in the central lens 282. It is possible to perform various luminous effects. In addition, by making the upper center side group 107 emit light, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness to give the player a chance or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a certain variation game). State, time-saving game state, probability variation time-short game state, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate light from above the player's head toward the player, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the LED 286b with high brightness. ..

Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, the front edge of the upper plate 301 is made to emit light, and by making it emit light in association with the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit is operated. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the 401 or the pressing operation unit 405. Further, by appropriately lighting the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit group 109, a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guides the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. You can Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation unit group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108. , 109, or each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, it is possible to perform a luminescence effect with different gradations of luminescent color, brightness, etc. It is possible to produce a light-emitting effect with rich expressions.

Thus, in the door frame 5, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are arranged in the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101. And, since it is possible to emit light by being divided into a second annular group 103 far from the game window 101 on the outside of the first annular group 102, a plurality of substantially concentric circles are provided outside the gaming window 101 (gaming area 1100). The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be decorated in a light emitting manner, and by surrounding the periphery of the game window 101 with light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect which is not available in conventional pachinko gaming machines, and which attracts the attention of the player strongly. And can be.

In addition, one circumferential lens unit 210a, 250a is provided with LEDs of two systems arranged substantially concentrically, and even if the appearance looks like one, each LED of the two systems is made to emit light. Since the light emission decoration can be performed in a substantially concentric shape, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the mode of the light emission decoration from the appearance. 240) can be greatly changed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be enhanced in that the impact of the light-emitting decoration can be increased and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

[3-13. Second embodiment of door frame]
Subsequently, the door frame 5 according to the above-described embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “the door frame according to the first embodiment”) of the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. Although the operation unit 400 is attached to the center of the upper portion, the embodiment relating to the door frame to which the liquid crystal display device is attached in addition to the operation unit 400 (hereinafter, referred to as “the door frame according to the second embodiment”). The above will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of a door frame of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. In addition, in the figure, in the component code|symbol which concerns on the door frame 5'which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, the component which has the same function as the component which concerns on the door frame 5 which concerns on 1st Embodiment attached|subjected the same number.

First, the big difference between the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment and the door frame 5 according to the first embodiment is that the operation unit 400 is located at the center of the upper part of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 according to the first embodiment. On the other hand, while the operation unit 400 is attached to the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment, the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 is attached to the right side of the dish unit 300. That is the point. A small difference other than the above is that the shapes of the cover body 426 and the surface cover 428 of the operation unit 400 attached to the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 according to the first embodiment interfere with the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470. The point that they are not formed and the shape of the operation unit attachment portion 314c formed at the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 according to the first embodiment also interferes with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. And the shapes of the upper plate front decorative member 316, the upper plate upper lens 318, the upper plate upper inner lens 319, and the like of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 according to the first embodiment are upward. It is formed so as not to interfere with the dish side liquid crystal display device 470, and there is almost no difference other than the above.

The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment is formed in a curved shape so as to project forward from the left direction toward the center in a front view, and the center thereof. It is formed so as to project forward in a straight line from right to right. An operation unit attachment portion 314c to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed in the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300, and a liquid crystal attachment portion 314d for attaching the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. To be done. The upper plate upper panel 314 on which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and when this portion is pressed downward by a player, for example, the portion is bent downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 with the hand, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. By bending the upper plate upper panel 314, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged. That is, the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is damaged. If the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 will be replaced. In this case, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is detached from the broken upper plate upper panel 314 and attached to the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 to be replaced for reuse.

Since the upper plate upper panel 314 covers the upper outer periphery of the upper plate body 312 shown in FIG. 39, the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d for mounting the above-mentioned upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed in this portion. And, since a part of the upper plate 301 is covered by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, and the actual amount of the game on the upper plate 301 is increased. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the balls are stored. On the other hand, in the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment, as described above, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is mounted on the right side of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. Since the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d for is formed, a partial area of the upper plate 301 is never covered by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the number of game balls stored in the upper plate 301 is set to the number of games. It is easy for the player to visually recognize, and the player can easily understand how many game balls are actually stored in the upper plate 301. Further, in the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment, as described above, the liquid crystal for mounting the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 on the right side of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. Since the mounting portion 314d is formed, the arrangement of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 causes the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to approach the chest of the player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the pachinko machine. A player sitting on the opposite side of the gaming machine 1 can easily visually recognize the contents of the effect unfolded in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, while sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even if another player standing behind the player looks into the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 from behind the player, the content of the effect unfolded in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is displayed. It becomes extremely difficult to see.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 61. 56 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 57 is a rear view of the main body frame. 58 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 59 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the main body frame as disassembled and seen from the rear. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is axially supported on the left side in front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a front surface of the main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640, which are respectively attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end as viewed, are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a prize for paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600. Ball unit 700 and a ball outlet which is attached to the front surface of the body frame base 600 and blocks the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3. And an opening/closing unit 790.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling the door frame 5 other than the game board 4 and the electric parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unitized body of the above, a back cover 900 that covers the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[4-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. 62 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view that is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is located in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth. As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 is a game board holding that can fit and hold the outer circumference of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part. The opening 601, the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the front end outer periphery of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side in front view, and the front frame of the front end frame portion 602 that is recessed rearward from the front surface, and the door frame base body in the door frame 5 Door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of 110, upper bending protrusion 167 protruding rearward of upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in reinforcing unit 150 of door frame 5, and open side projecting rearward of open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the outer bending protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and a lower rear wall portion that spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like this.

Further, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board mounting portion 606 on which the game board 4 is mounted, and the game board mounting portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a predetermined position of the inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the right side in front view are formed. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 56) to which a stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the front side right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. There is. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but its movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left end portion in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. The unit 610 is provided (see FIG. 63). As shown in FIG. 62, etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, so that the upper shaft supporting metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft supporting metal fitting 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. You can do it. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the right end upper part of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and the door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view. And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, in the main body frame base 600, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and on the front right side front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In the state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 58, FIG. A foul space 626 spreading downward is formed. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 descends. The game ball that has been played is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front, and above the openings 614 and on the left and right sides when viewed from the front. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is adapted to be closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 60 and the like), and through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the lower rear wall 604. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface of the board unit 800 face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having a collision wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view to the front and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 56 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that expands in a fan shape around a shaft center supported by a fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (a side that becomes a rear end when rotated clockwise in a front view). This game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported on the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a projects upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving to the front side. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by coming into contact with the stopper 617, the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is regulated. Is becoming

Further, in the main body frame base 600, a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( As shown in FIG. 63), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that extend vertically inward in the front-rear direction on the inner side (shaft support side) of the engaging groove 603 on the right (open side) side in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock engaging hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is lined up in two left-right directions are provided below the lower door hook hole 620. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in substantially the center of the vertical direction. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is performed. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 58).

Further, the main body frame base 600, when viewed from the rear, gently and obliquely descends from the upper end on the right side toward the center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604, and then at the center in the left-right direction, the lower rear wall part 604. It is provided with a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 that hangs down from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly higher than the main frame frame. This main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is designed so that the rear side is closed by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the game ball that has flowed through the ball removal passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 will be described later in detail. It is now in circulation.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided at the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 605 at the rear end of the rear side as viewed from the rear, and a plurality of back cover shaft support portions 623 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction and pivotally support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 diagonally upper left in front view of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed on.

[4-2. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame base 600 on the front end left end upper and lower rear view front surface of the main body frame base 600 using predetermined screws, respectively. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extending portion 632, the shaft supporting pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side in front view of the shaft supporting pin 633. And a door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 58) penetrating in the up-down direction and the front extension 632 hangs downward from the left end of the front extension 632 in a front view to the open side. And a stopper (not shown) that regulates the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5, and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that vertically penetrates near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and the front extending portion. And a stopper 642d that is provided upright from the left end of the front view of 642b and that restricts the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, the mounting portion 642a, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

In addition, the main body frame support metal fitting 644 of the lower support metal fitting 640 is attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. Also in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extending portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame shaft support metal fitting. The front extension portion 642b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 can be attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween. ing.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 to form a shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal support 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal support 640. Are positioned on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal member 644 of the lower shaft support metal member 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal member 21 of the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. The hole 642c and the hole 642c are located coaxially with each other, and the door pin 5 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. The lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 in an openable and closable manner. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. By sliding the shaft pin 155 downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 vertically overlap with each other, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[4-3. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. FIG. 65 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 is capable of driving the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the strength corresponding to the rotating operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, a launching base 652 made of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a protruding forward from the lower back face of the launching base 652. Of the firing solenoid 654, the hammer 656 fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement of the hammer tip 658. A hammer 656 at the tip of the hammer 656 is provided between a launch rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in a front view from a predetermined position on the trajectory and is attached to the front surface of the launch base 652, and a launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. At the same time as the tip 658 is made passable, a ball stopper piece 662 that holds a game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 and forms a gap that the game ball cannot pass, and at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662. A stopper 664 for restricting rotation of the hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) from the hitting position at which the held game ball can be hit is provided.

Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the rotary drive shaft 654a reciprocally rotates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. .. Further, the batting mallet 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending in a gentle arc shape from the fixed portion 656a so that the tip is located at the axis of the rotary drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a rod portion 656b in which the mallet tip 658 is fixed to the tip end in the direction of the normal line, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with the fixing portion 656a interposed between the rod portion 656b and the stopper 664 and can come into contact with the stopper portion 656c. Equipped with. Since the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 contacts the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower side is recessed so as to be substantially along the lower extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 88), and in the front-back direction. On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 which covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting the turning end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a turning position of the hitting mallet 656 apart from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 that regulates the end (rotating end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 abuts can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the abutting can be suppressed. It is like this.

As shown in FIG. 58, FIG. 88, etc., when the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially at the center in the left-right direction and the lower rear wall portion is. It is arranged to be located below the upper end of 604, that is, the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), and the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward in the left-right direction with a predetermined width is formed between the lower end and the lower end. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view with respect to the launch rail 660, so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 is provided. The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received in the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the hitting ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4130 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It can be driven so as to be synchronized with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball and drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 from that state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is adapted to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Therefore, the launching solenoid 654 is driven simultaneously with the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580 ( By turning on), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the hitting mallet 656. There is.

[4-4. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 73. 66 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear view of the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit. FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 72 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. In addition, FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko island facility in the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Based on a predetermined payout instruction, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is paid out to the upper plate 301. This prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a prize ball tank attached to the upper portion of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the Pachinko Island facility side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 which is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and which aligns the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends it to the downstream side, and the game balls which are aligned by the tank rail unit 730 are predetermined. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game balls are full. It is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 of the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 formed on its rear surface (see FIG. 69).

In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in a front view. It is made of synthetic resin and is integrally molded. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width and is arranged in substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. This prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

The prize ball base 710 is provided with a prize ball tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and is arranged beside the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view) with an external terminal board 784. And an external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the external terminal plate cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 on the rear side of the vertical side, and the prize ball passage 715 which is adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 and which guides the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 downward. And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branching unit 770 at the lower end of the rear wall portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and escape holes 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a mounting hole, a mounting boss, or the like for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, or the like, or the body frame base 600. Is formed on.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 70, the prize ball tank 720 of the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper side, and has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721, and a right side rear portion (rear portion on the open side) that is rectangular in plan view and protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721. A discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the right rear portion projecting rearward of the bottom wall part 721 of the rear part 722 and opening downward, and a plate shape from the left side (shaft support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Formed on the eaves portion 724 that extends to the rear, the rod-shaped shaft portion 725 that extends rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in plan view, the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and the front end of the outer peripheral wall portion 722. An attaching portion 726 for attaching the tank 720 to the award ball tank attaching portion 711 of the award ball base 710.

In this prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein, and the other end side hangs down by its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730. In addition, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent game balls from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730, and It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although not shown in detail, the top surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view is lowered toward the right side, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723 in a plan view. As a result, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, and the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed and the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape of a predetermined depth with an open upper side, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction, and a left end (axial support side) end in front view. The bottom is slanted so that This tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 73) that opens downward at the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 68) that protrude further downward and are locked from the upper side to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 are provided. This tank rail 731 is arranged such that the right end (open side) end in front view is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 are stored. After being received, it can be rolled to the left and passed from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 that covers the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper that can be moved back and forth in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game spheres divided into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 is provided with a mounting portion 734a on which the ball stopper 735 is mounted, and two slits 734b which vertically pass through the protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735.

In the tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. Further, the ball retainer plate 734 is for forcibly setting the game ball that has not been stepped up by the ball leveling member 727 to be stepped up, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 are axially supported so as to shift by half pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 731a on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows alternate one by one. Device 740.

It should be noted that the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball inside the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. Is becoming Although not shown in detail, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 can be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, it is possible to remove the charged static electricity.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the ball stopper 735 rotatably mounted on the mounting portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734 is rotated so that the protrusion 735 a of the ball stopper 735 is passed through the slit 734 b to the inside of the tank rail 731. By inserting into, it is possible to close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 by the projecting piece 735a, it is possible to stop the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game ball discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 that is attached to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage that opens to the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly lower than the vertical center with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined width, and a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b A prize ball passage 741c opening to the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (the pivotal support side) in rear view and extends downward and opens to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

The prize ball device 740 includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support plate 743 disposed below the back cover 742. , A payout motor 744 arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects rearward of the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 can rotate integrally. A first gear 745 that is fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is axially supported by the unit base 741, and a unit gear 74 that meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 axially supported by the third gear 747 and the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741 sandwiches the third gear 747. And a rotation detection plate 749, which is fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable and in which a plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection slits 749a are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and a ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball attached to the unit base 741 and flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c. Counting switch 751 for detecting the rotation angle, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a formed in a rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a back cover 742 that holds the rotation angle switch 752. The rotation angle switch substrate 753 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 742 that relays the connection between the payout motor 744, the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 and the payout control board 4110. And a substrate 754 inside the ball case.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the base plate 754 in the prize ball case from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection plate). 749), and a rotation angle switch substrate 753 from the rear side, and a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with a back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 can be contacted. The supply passage grounding metal fitting 757, the screw 758 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 while sandwiching the motor support plate 743, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744, and the back cover 742 can be attached to and detached from the unit base 741. And a detachable button 759 for supporting.

In the prize ball device 740, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 to close the open rear ends of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d. It has become so. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be alleviated. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 has a side surface on one side (left side in rear view) lower than a position in the supply passage 741a that bulges rearward partially cut out and outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the out-of-ball switch 750, a switch mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting switch 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and so as to penetrate in the front-back direction below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball break switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and is present in the supply passage 741a. The presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball break switch 750 when the operating piece is pressed by the game ball. In the state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball cut switch 750 (ball cut state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall indicating that the ball is cut out. It will be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotating body 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed on the upper part of the unit base 741. I have it. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 to the grounding metal fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 comes into contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball flowing in the supply passage 741a through the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is removed. You can do it.

The back lid 742 of the prize ball device 740 is in the form of a vertically long plate as a whole, and has an upper end bulged rearward. A button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attachment/detachment button 759 is formed on the top of the back cover 742, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball case substrate 754 and the substrate cover 755 on a substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay substrate. A rotation angle switch substrate mounting portion 742c for mounting the rotation angle switch substrate 753, which is disposed below the mounting portion 742b, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in the present embodiment, and is configured to come into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is generated. The heat can be easily dissipated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated in the recesses 748a one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. Further, the three detection slits 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detecting board 749, and The rotation position of the pay-out rotating body 748 can be detected by detecting the detection slit 749a by the rotation angle switch 752, which are provided at positions corresponding to the space between the recesses 748a. In this embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749 (dispensing rotor 748) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 744 in 18 steps.

In the prize ball device 740, the payout motor 744 is rotated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100 or a lending command from the CR unit to the payout control board 4110 or operating the ball removal switch 860b. Then, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). When the rotating shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotating shaft 744a is rotated, at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is adapted to rotate. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detecting board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotating body 748 rotates in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction. The rotation of the payout rotating body 748 is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in about two steps.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 72, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one and then passed to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball removing passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball removing passage 741d are, from the lower end of the ball removing passage 741d, a ball removing passage 778 of a full tank branching unit 770, a body frame base ball removing passage 622 of the body frame base 600, and a substrate unit 800. The board unit base 810 can be discharged to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68, 69 and 73. The full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. At the same time, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 become full, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

The full-tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the upper part of the center in the front-rear direction by a locking part 770a that is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710, and is fixed to the upper part of the rear end on the back surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixed portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the attachment locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and thus the prize ball base 710 is By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole is lowered as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and the upper end of the rear end is opened upward in the substantial center in the left-right direction. A prize ball socket 771 for receiving a game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball socket 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 73). And, the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 73) that guides the game ball toward the front side from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 73), and the game ball flowing through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward to the front of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens to the right end of the view and a full tank passage 775 that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 73). ) And a game ball that has flowed through the full tank passage 775 to the front, and a full tank outlet 776 that is open to the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 in front view is provided.

Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball removal port 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper portion in front view and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. A ball-removing passage 778 (see FIG. 73) for guiding the game ball received in the receiving/receiving port 777 to the front side, and the game ball flowing through the ball-removing passage 778 is discharged to the front so that the normal ball outlet 774 and A ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full-ball outlet 776.

In the full tank branching unit 770, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. And, the game ball discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 is configured to communicate with the second ball inlet 542c so as to face the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls that are supplied to and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. In addition, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear side, and the game balls released from the ball outlet 779 are connected to the body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base removal passage 622.

In this full tank branching unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down in the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, and passes through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet 544a of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

By the way, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot be output from the 544a to the upper plate 301 side stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage 773 in the upstream is also filled through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts to move laterally in the branch space 772 and then moves laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b under the dish unit 300. It is adapted to be supplied to the dish 302.

In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 automatically lowers the game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740 until the full game tank is filled with the game balls until the full tank is resolved. Since it can be supplied to the plate 302, the upper plate becomes full like a conventional pachinko game machine and the ball is no longer supplied to the ball striking device by operating the ball removal button on the upper plate. Can be prevented from being interrupted, the annoyance during the game can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

As described above, the full tank branching unit 770 branches the passage of the game balls to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, the rear part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game balls accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are directly driven by the hitting ball launching device 650. The game balls can be played, and the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 301 is substantially the total amount of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. In other words, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. be able to. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 small, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided. It is possible to make the pachinko gaming machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and to entertain the player by the large game area 1100.

[4-5. Ball exit opening/closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. Further, FIG. 76 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view, When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to interrupt the flow of the game balls.

The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view so as not to project from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction; an opening/closing crank 793 for sliding the opening/closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction; And an opening/closing spring 794 that biases the

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening/closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to project above the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank that is arranged on the front surface of the left end in front view and that supports the opening/closing crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening/closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in the front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged near the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter main body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter main body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ) And a drive hole 792b having a horizontally long rectangular shape, which is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening/closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view. From the right side to the right, and the tip extends to the vicinity of the center of the opening 791b in the left-right direction, and the drive rod 793b is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening/closing shutter 792 by protruding rearward from the tip of the drive rod 793b. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d that extends downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and has a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end of the open/close spring 794 formed on the intermediate upper surface of the drive rod 793b). ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, the drive pin 793c of the open/close crank 793 is vertically rotated in an arc shape by rotating the open/close crank 793 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c is inserted. The opening/closing shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the driving hole 792b. In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 contacts the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is configured to be rotated clockwise in the front view against the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening/closing shutter 792 descends so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 and the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening/closing crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the urging force of the opening/closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, in response to opening/closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to be automatically opened. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[4-6. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 77 to 81. 77 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after disassembling it. 81(A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and FIG. 81(B) is a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 81(A).

The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A firing power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the front view of 810, a power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear surface and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 that is attached to the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front, a main door relay terminal board 880 and peripheral door relay attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810. And a terminal plate 882.

As shown in the figure, the board unit base 810 of the board unit 800 has a shape that extends in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction descends one step downwards and gradually inclines upward toward both left and right ends, and inclines upward from the front. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 that protrudes to the front, an opening 812 that is disposed above the position of the center of the shielding wall portion 811 that is lowered by one step in the left-right direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is in front view at the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811. A board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end for mounting the main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a cylinder penetrating in a laterally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 in front view. -Shaped duct part 814, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and a rear view left side (front view right side) upper part. A box housing portion 816 that is opened rearward and upward on the rear surface and is capable of housing the front side of the firing power supply board box 830 is provided.

In this board unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. In addition, the board unit base 810 sends the game ball, which has flowed down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622, through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810. You can do it.

In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are forward from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. To face. Further, the board unit base 810 can favorably transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a lower speaker 821 attached so as to face the front side. This speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 via a predetermined maze-like passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting more deep bass to the caliber of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted to the front. ing.

The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This emission power supply substrate 831 is provided with a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 that charges and discharges electric power from the DC/DC converter 831a, and the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The combined current obtained by merging with the current generated by the discharge from is driven through the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650. This emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a as heat dissipation holes formed on its upper and lower surfaces in order to radiate heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing. Since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC/DC converter 831a, a slit 830a as a heat dissipation hole is formed on the side surface of the emission power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged. .. In addition, in the power source board box 830, a partition wall 830b that partitions the internal space into two spaces, a space for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is formed on the upper inner wall. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall with the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 to close the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830, the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces, that is, a housing space 830c for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a, are formed, the partition wall 830b serves as a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , And a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a function as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting. The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is housed by being released to the outside via the 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC/DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a is used as heat radiation holes formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slit 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing in the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. The miniaturization of the firing power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle and facilitates the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831, which can contribute to the reduction of the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the emission power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the emission power supply board 831 is still attached to the end opening of the emission power supply board box 830. Moreover, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game must be interrupted, the work of exchanging the firing power supply board 831 can be performed. Since it can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be very easily eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be eliminated at an early stage to restart the game.

The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged at a frequency of 100 times per minute, for example, every time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the pachinko island facility, it does not repeatedly charge and discharge at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. It has a very long life compared to. In other words, the emission power supply substrate 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply substrate 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 that is separate from the power supply board 851. It is possible to concentrate the electronic components on the power supply board 851 due to the long-term change of As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component, which has a long service life and is aged, from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short service life.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game balls discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 on the left front side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and a side surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. And a front box housing portion 843 that is opened forward and upward and can house the rear side of the firing power supply board box 830, and the front end of the power supply board box 850 that is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side. And a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the board unit base 810 is formed by flowing through the body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the board frame base 600 and passing through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed down to and the game ball that is discharged from the out-ball discharging unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 will be described later in detail, through the discharge passage 842, the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close a front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is configured to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like is externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 80, the power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so that the dimension in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a horizontally long, thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened. 862, and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 98) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separating/cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and the separating/cutting portions 863 are provided at one place. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 from each other, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball-removing switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 57). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 includes a board base 871 mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820 and a frame peripheral relay terminal mounted on the rear surface of the board base 871 and fixed to the rear panel peripheral terminal 872 toward the rear. A board 868, a gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 attached to the rear surface of the board base 871 and having the CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed rearward, a peripheral panel relay terminal 872, and a CR unit relay terminal 873 are rearward. A substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the substrate base 871 so as to face the side. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency display for displaying the operating state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine on which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 are the peripheral control board 4140 and the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, which are provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-door relay terminal plate 882 are mounted on the board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so as to face from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are configured such that the front sides thereof are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and at the same time, the relay terminal plate cover 692 is covered. Only the connection terminal is exposed to the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a neat appearance (see FIG. 56 and the like).

In addition, the main door relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch of the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. It is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full-tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the switches 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[4-7. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 82A is a front perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame, and FIG. 82B is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame. The back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. This back cover 900 has a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of axial support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction and project downward and are axially supported by the back cover axial support part 623 of the main body frame base 600, and prize balls formed on the upper and lower parts of the left side of the main body part 902 in front view. An engaging piece 908 is provided that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, respectively.

In addition, the back cover 900 penetrates in a horizontally long rectangular shape along the lower side on the left side of the connection cutout portion 910 when viewed from the front side, and the connection cutout portion 910 that is cut out upward in a rectangular shape at the lower end of the main body portion 902 on the right side when viewed from the front. The confirmation opening 912 and the confirmation cutout 914 cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in front view are provided.

The back cover 900 can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the back support shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 with the shaft support pin 906, and the engaging piece By engaging 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. Although not shown in detail, the front cover left side of the back cover 900 is provided on the rear surface of the prize ball unit 700 by a predetermined screw in addition to the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a. It is designed to be fixed to.

Further, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 so that the RAM clear switch 4100e, the test terminal 4100f, etc. of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 face to the rear side through the connection cutout 910. It has become. Further, in the back cover 900, a hermetic seal (not shown) of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and the main control board box 1170 passes through the confirmation cutout 914. The sealing portion 1176 is exposed. Thus, it is possible to confirm the operation and appearance of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

In addition, the back cover 900 has a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is used for the main body frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side.

[4-8. Side crime prevention plate]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. The side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side-face crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded into a shallow U-shape in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 fixed to the upper and lower portions near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaging with the positioning recessed portion 1119 of the game board 4.

The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 has a side plate piece 952a extending substantially in the vertical direction and having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600, and a front and rear direction of the side plate piece 952a. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap behind the front end piece 952b and having a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front side from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d that extends longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction when viewed. The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by the side plate piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d.

The side crime prevention plate 950 has a mounting bracket 954 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and a rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In this side surface crime prevention plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 causes the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 to support the shaft supporting side plate. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the letter-shaped protrusion 166, and prevents a tool for performing an illegal act from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. You can do it. Further, the main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded mold material, and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a, and Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength/rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 is enhanced, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be enhanced to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

[4-9. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. 83A is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. FIG. 84(A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 84(B) is a sliding rod for a glass door frame and a slide for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view showing a rod, and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device after disassembling it, and FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass rod frame sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod in the locking device. Yes, FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

The locking device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 from approximately the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 62. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in an upper part of a right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in a lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600. A plurality of lock attachment portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base body 1001 as a lock base body having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. Tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the bottom of the base 1001.

The U-shaped base body 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base body 1001 has a lateral width that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is formed by a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the left-right dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the left-right dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, so that the game area can be further increased. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 become the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts against the lock device 1000 from the outside.

In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). The hook through opening 1002, the upper side of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 85) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw stopper 1003 projecting outward in the middle, and the screw stopper The upper end and the middle part on the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 85) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projecting portion 1003 protrudes, and the front end protrudes from the lower ends of the both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b on the open side. Locking projection 1004.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 603 of the main body frame base 600 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, when the screw locking portion 623 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and then moved upward, the screw locking portion 1003 is aligned. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attaching portion 625 via the lock device 1000.

The lock device 1000 is mounted by screws not only in the upper and middle screw stoppers 1003, but also in the screw stopper 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described below and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also attached to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, lower, middle and upper sides are provided with the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes. Since it has a structure in which the locking device 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting part 625 with a screw, the locking device 1000 has a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and locking the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 forming the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) is provided on the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 forming the fixing structure on the rear side is provided so as to project from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front side locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. A rivet 1006 is inserted into the insertion hole 1005 and caulked in a state where the body frame sliding rod 1050 is housed, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 84(C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper ends of the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, lower, and middle three positions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the elongated rivet holes 1055, 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved upward and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with a tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower part thereof, and a side surface 1001b which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side, and protrudes laterally from the front end. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. Although the details of the fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 when the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The lock insertion hole 1009, which is provided so as to project from the front end portion to the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010, are mounted at two upper and lower positions so as to be mounted with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 bored in and a screw fastening portion 1003 bored to attach the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 that biases the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and a side escape hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. Equipped with.

The cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and has one end side serving as a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement projection piece 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

In this cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion is inserted from a rear side into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008, and then attachment holes 1013 formed in upper and lower two locations of a lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through.

The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illicitly move the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire or a wire to illicitly move the body frame sliding rod 1050. This is to prevent lowering. As shown in FIG. 85, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023, together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001, passes through the swing shaft hole 1025. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 is opened vertically in the plate-shaped surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base body 1001 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The ascending engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined to the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely above and diagonally so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 87 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 87(B)).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base body 1001 side from an outer side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely rearward and downward, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a restricting protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 that penetrate through the restricting protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and that are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inserted into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from unintentionally sliding. Further, the restriction protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, whereby the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

In addition, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed in the pin hole 1029 is Guide the first tampering prevention member 1023 along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally elongated opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. You can do it. Furthermore, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second tampering prevention member 1032 connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 is formed of a plate material having an inverted "te" shape, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The second tampering prevention member 1032 may be rotatably connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first tampering prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, the spring 1035 urges the spring upward. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the locking device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base body 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 that project toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one longitudinal side of the door frame. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is projected forward from the open side of the U-shaped base body 1001 in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600 (see FIGS. 58 and 62, etc.) protrudes forward and the door is opened. The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. It should be noted that the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover can be lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long slot for rivet 1042 formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the top slot for rivet 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, there is provided a guide projecting piece 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding rod for door frame 1040. The rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is adapted to be inserted with the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 is slid for the door frame. It is formed vertically long so as not to interfere with the raising operation of the rod 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that has penetrated the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact with it. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at an upper end portion for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 causes the sliding of the door frame. The rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like this.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 has a tip end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The section constitutes a movable space. Further, when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the pivot movement of the engagement cam 1016 causes the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame to ascend. For engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049, which is notched larger than the fraud prevention notch 1007 in the up-down direction, at the lower rear of the vertical side. The escape notch 1049 interferes with the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 surely engages with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The relevant part is cut out so as not to become.

On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, Is equipped with. That is, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and is made of a metal including an upper hook member 1051 and a lower hook member 1052 having hook portions 1054 and 1065. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently housed in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating in a lateral direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper inside of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claw portion is formed upward.

Further, the rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In the normal state where the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1040 are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured so that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. It has no play and can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from a lower end portion and a rivet penetrating left and right in the vicinity of an upper end of a plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. The long hole 1061, the lower engaging hole 1062 arranged below the long hole for rivet 1061, the play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the lower engaging hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed at the lower portion of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portions 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet elongated hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet elongated hole 1061 is riveted. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

Further, when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and is rotated, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotating operation. Are for engaging. In addition, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is inserted into the second engaging projection 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 so that the second engaging projection 1018 does not interfere with the rotating operation of the second engaging projection 1018. The distal end of the can form a movable space. A guide protrusion 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding member 1040 are inserted. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without any play.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and superposed. In a state where they are overlapped with each other, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main body frame After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet elongated holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the bottom end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole. It is necessary to fix it to the screw 1029 with a screw (not shown), and then insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base body 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is closed. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is spanned between the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second improper prevention. The member 1032 is brought into contact with the restriction projection 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is also inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tampering prevention member 1023.

As described above, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning with the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 forming the locking structure of the front part is projectingly formed on the side surface 1001a which is not in contact with the peripheral wall part 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 while the rear part is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so that rattling does not occur.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. As shown in FIG. 86, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are engaged with the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the hook portion 1041 for the door frame of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the door frame 5 are The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In that state, when a not-shown key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 86(B). The tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and connect with this. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the body frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the body frame 3 to the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 86A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 has an upper side inclined downwardly toward the outer side, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since it abuts on the lower end portion, the body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 upward claw portions and the closing plates 24 and 25 are re-engaged. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 86(C), The tip of the second engaging projection piece 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 86A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame becomes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward by contacting the upper end of the door frame, and the downward hooking portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are again locked to each other. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portions 1041 that are attached over the entire length and that are engaged with the door frame 5 are formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. You are unable to perform any act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the main body frame 3 according to the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the door frame 5 can be unlocked from the body frame 3. In addition, the lock device 1000 does not allow an illegal act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. It has become. The first of the structures for preventing such fraud is a locking mechanism composed of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding bar 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It is in the state of having done. In this state, the first tampering prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise by the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tampering prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 tampering prevention notch. It is in a state of engaging with an engaging notch portion 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even when a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to unlock the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engaging protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engaging protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. Starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a whole, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, so that the hook portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 are released from each other, and the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Therefore, the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1023. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the abutting portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 87(A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after releasing, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For that reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the above are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Since it is in the state, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 are pulled down. This prevents fraudulent tools from entering the enclosed space, so that fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a door frame sliding rod 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose lateral width is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the conventional L-shaped base is integrated. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base body 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely increased and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

Further, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the inside The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, which are arranged in the above, are completely covered by the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. It is impossible to easily carry out an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided therein.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, middle, and lower sides are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. Since it is structured such that the screw locking portions 1003 formed at three positions on the upper, middle and lower sides of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the structure is extremely simple. With such a structure, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

In the locking device 1000, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 and a lock formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 have a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. Although the structure in which the mounting portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 that mounts the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 uses the lock mounting piece 1008. A structure may be employed in which lock mounting holes penetrating and screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625. It can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the locking device 1000, the one in which the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b is shown. The frame-shaped sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame-shaped sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is L-shaped. As a base body (lock base body), a door frame slide rod 1040 and a main body frame slide rod 1050 are housed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and a first side wall. The structure may be good, and the same operational effects as those of the locking device 1000 described above can be obtained.

[5. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 95. FIG. 88 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko gaming machine removed. 89 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 92 is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to the pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 90 and the like seen from the front, and FIG. 94 is a game of FIG. 93 seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 93 taken in the vertical direction.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment defines the outer periphery of a game area 1100 in which a player operates a handle device 500 to hit a game ball, and the outer shape is a substantially rectangular front shape. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. Based on a control signal from the main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that is mounted on the rear surface of the game machine 1100 and controls the contents of a game that is played by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180, which is capable of displaying the game status and is visibly attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, is provided. Although not shown in FIGS. 88 to 95 and the details will be described later, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, it is further provided (see FIGS. 96 and 97).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by the front component member 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[5-1. Previous component]
Subsequently, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The outer shape of the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape is a substantially circular shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and thus has an inner shape. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is divided by the inner circumference. The front component 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in the front view, and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from a lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 that extends in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction in front view, the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. Of the game area 1100 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1112, and the stop portion 1114 to which the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 can be brought into contact. From the upper end of the inner rail 1112, which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the outer guide surface 1115, which is arranged at the lowermost end and becomes lower toward the rear, and closes the outer rail 1111. Only the closed position that extends upward and the open position that rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front to open the space between the outer rail 1111 and the closed position are allowed to return and return to the closed position side. And a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown).

When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. It is adapted to be located on an extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space that is widened in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launching device 650. By jumping over the space, it is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is installed. , By turning to the open position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Also, when the game ball is hit hard in the ball-striking launcher 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. It is possible to forcibly change the rolling direction of the game ball by contacting the game ball with this stopper 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (struck) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not received in the starting openings 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the table unit 2000 which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, by the out-port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, it is guided to the out-port 1151 of the game panel 1150, and discharged from the out-port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downwards in the opposite direction, and from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, a far space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed. When it falls, it is received in the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

The outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to its surface to improve wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball and to allow the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. Further, the stopper portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is mitigated. The game ball can be repelled inward.

In addition, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention protrusion 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially vertical center along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the outlet guide surface 1115. A rail-shaped crime prevention groove 1118 in the shape of a groove extending from the front end to a predetermined depth. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 of the front component member 1110 overlaps with the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. As a result, even if an injustice tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the injustice tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. You can't.

Further, in the front component 1110, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention rear projection 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. At the same time, the post-crime projection 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. The inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118, and the crime prevention post piece 182 also prevent an illegal tool such as a piano wire that has entered between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 from reaching the game area 1100. You can do it.

In addition, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 that are recessed from the front to the rear and open at the left end, and are separated in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged in a row, a fixing recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 when viewed from the front and opened downward and an upper side formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side. Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage notch 1122, which is a rectangular notch extending upward in the left-right direction from the lower end upward. The positioning recessed portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to the positioning member 956 mounted inside the side surface crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 in front view. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, so that the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, the front end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

Further, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a state in which the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and in a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3. When it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It is like this. Further, the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage cutout 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is provided with a game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3. The front end of the full tank branching unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152 in the state of being inserted into.

Further, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at a position on the lower side of the through hole 1123 to the left in front view from the center in the left-right direction. A fastening portion 1124 that is thinly formed, and a certificate paper sticking portion 1125 that is arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 when viewed from the front and that sticks a certificate paper for certificate confirmation are provided. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 has a predetermined fastening band in the fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame when the game board is attached to the conventional body frame. By winding and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged outside the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing the game panel 1150, the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 can be held between them. In addition, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front end on the left side in the front view at the lower end. And a downwardly-projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the lower right corner of the front view, and a ball-passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball-passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110. And an insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower portion, and positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 (see FIG. 91) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1151 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front and the lower end side is opened downward. And a notch portion 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. A plurality of obstacle nails are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement inside, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the outlet 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled on the game board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out-out guide surface 1115 entered into the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box-like shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharging portion 1161 formed so as to vertically penetrate at a front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and an upper surface of the bottom wall portion has an out-ball discharging portion 1161. The game balls are formed so as to be lower toward the discharge portion 1161, are discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are supplied (discharged) to the bottom surface of the substrate holder 1160. Are discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. The out-ball discharging portion 1161 is located directly above the discharging-ball receiving portion 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from all are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

The substrate holder 1160 also includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 that project forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixing bosses 1162 are designed such that the tips are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1150, and are fitted with the rear ends of the attachment bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. With the boss 1126 fitted, a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 while being assembled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side at the rear end left side end of the rear wall portion, and a fixing portion. An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear side. The fixed portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 allow the main control substrate box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160.

[5-4. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. This main control board box 1170 is a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 whose rear side is opened, and a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 which covers the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be fitted is provided, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals, etc. mounted on the rear surface side is provided at the front end of the board cover 1172. The main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and is fitted to the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and the right end of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the rear. An elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right and left ends in rear view with two elastic fixing pieces 1175 sandwiched therebetween to seal the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing part 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) that is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal. And a protective cover 1177. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same structure as the separating/cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed at any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulked and fixed sealing portion 1176 so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. As a result, whether the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally or not can be clearly discriminated visually from the outside.

Since the main control board box 1170 has four sealing portions 1176 in this embodiment, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 is provided with a hermetic seal extending over the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut or peeled off. It is necessary to do this, and even in this hermetic seal, there are traces of opening and closing. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened/closed, the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified, or the main control board 4100 is replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even so, it is possible to visually confirm it from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the misconduct.

Further, the main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-back direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and a RAM clear switch 4100e and a test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like are exposed to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f exposed from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and hermetically sealed seal are cleverly worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 can be confirmed by other than visual inspection, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 with high crime prevention performance can be obtained. You can do it.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, and the display unit 1181 disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side and the front component member 1110. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 92, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 has one LED for displaying a game state that changes depending on a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view. Consisting of a game state indicator 1183 and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game state indicator 1183, and an upper special symbol memory display for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game balls into the upper starting opening 2101. Device 1184, and one 7-segment LED for displaying the first special lottery result, which is arranged on the right side of the upper special symbol memory display device 1184 and is drawn by receiving the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101, as the first special symbol The upper special symbol display 1185 consisting of, and the second special lottery result which is arranged by diagonally right above the upper special symbol display 1185 and is selected by receiving the game balls into the lower starting opening 2102 is displayed as the second special symbol. The lower special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for, and the two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186 consists of the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102. It is provided with a lower special symbol memory display device 1187 for displaying.

In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reservations regarding the passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game balls which are arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially above the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display device 1186. A normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for doing, and a normal lottery result selected by a game ball placed under the normal symbol storage display passing through the gate portion 2350 is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for, and the diagonal right upper side of the normal symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", the special winning opening 2103 And a round display 1190 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the opening/closing pattern is repeated (the number of rounds).

The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 is a red/green/orange color and a full-color LED capable of changing its light emission color. It is possible to display various game states (for example, probability variation state, time reduction state, probability variation short time state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.).

Also, the upper special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the upper special symbol display 1185, when the game ball is received in the upper starting opening 2101, The start of variable display is held (stored), and the number of held (memorized) first special symbols is displayed. Above this special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b consisting of a predetermined LED, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a, 1184b lighting · The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b. Are lit together, when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is lit, and when the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is supposed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

Further, the lower special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the lower special symbol display 1186, when the game ball is received in the lower starting opening 2102, The start of variable display is held (stored), and the number of held (memorized) second special symbols is displayed. This lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and lighting of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b. The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the second special symbol storage display lamp 1187a, 1187b lights up together, when the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are Both are designed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

Further, the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. The special lottery result is displayed. The 7-segment LED is stopped after changing for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the light-emitting pattern (special pattern) of the stopped 7-segment LED causes the first special lottery result or The player can recognize the result of the second special lottery.

Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red/green/orange color and a full-color LED capable of changing its luminescent color, and a combination of luminescent color to be emitted and lighting/flashing. As a result, it is possible to display the normal lottery result that is drawn by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2350. The normal symbol display by the normal symbol display device 1189, like the special symbol, is changed and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180, when the normal symbol can not be displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display 1189, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350, the start of the variable display is suspended. The number of stored (memorized) ordinary symbols is displayed. This normal symbol storage display 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom depending on the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved symbols of normal symbols. In this embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbols is held (stored) up to four.

Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a two-round display lamp 1190a made of a predetermined LED and a fifteen-round display lamp 1190b. By turning on the respective lamps, the round in the "big hit" game is played. The number can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 92, the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Moreover, the game state display 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the upper special symbol memory display 1184, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the lower special symbol memory display 1187, the normal symbol memory display 1188, The normal symbol display device 1189 and the round display device 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 98). In addition, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, as compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table Even if the detailed structure of the game board 4 embodied by the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by a player or a clerk in the game hall without confusion.

[5-6. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150 and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and is larger than the outer shape of the front component member 1110. Also, a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 are provided.

The game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or glass or metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is a minimum necessary amount that can be sufficiently held even if an unillustrated obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has a thickness (8 to 10 mm). In this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1211 that are arranged near the outer circumference and are formed in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1212 that is arranged near the outer circumference in the lower left portion and that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. Equipped with. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a stepped engagement step portion 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of an upper side and a lower side thereof. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board described above (in the present embodiment, It is made of a synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin) having a length of about 20 mm. This panel holder 1220 holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner, and has a holding step portion 1221 that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and inside the holding step portion 1221 is approximately the same size as the game area 1100. A through hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction is mainly provided.

The holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is supposed to be on the same plane as. The front step inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with respect to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with engaging claws 1224 and engaging pieces 1225 that engage with the engaging step 1213 at positions corresponding to the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends from the front surface of the holding step 1221 to the front. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is arranged in the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and forms a panel between the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A predetermined amount of space is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 toward the upper side (center side) in a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement stepped portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted therein. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

As shown in FIG. 94, the panel holder 1220 is provided on the rear surface thereof with a mounting support portion 1227 which is recessed by a predetermined amount in the front side so as to leave an outer peripheral edge below and slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed in a state in which the rear outer peripheral portion projects rearward above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the recess amount ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in the present embodiment) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 97) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 that is mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is desirable that the distance is between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting rearward of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is a main frame. 3 (pachinko game machine 1) can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601.

Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing predetermined screws in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning projection formed on a member that is mounted and fixed by using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning projection that protrudes forward from a front flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a of the back box 3001 (shown in the figure). Is omitted)) is inserted. In addition, in this embodiment, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) as viewed from the rear.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a large diameter inner hole and a small inner diameter hole are mixed to have a proper diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixedly mounted. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 93, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height, and within the range. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is designed to be a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball emitted from the ball hitting launcher 650. However, the guide is smooth. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a thinned-out portion 1230 so that the attachment holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape and supports them and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-shaped rib is formed.

In addition, in this panel holder 1220, a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail implanting device (not shown) and an assembly jig is formed, and the game panel 1150 is held in the obstacle nail implanting device. It is possible to set it in the state where it was. In addition, in the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and a laterally long penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end on the left side in the front-back direction Is opened to the front passage 1112 of the front component 1110, and the ball passage cutout 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout 1122, and the front projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 94) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1232 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front and the lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 94 ). The member 1110 is provided with a notch portion 1236 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes at appropriate positions for mounting and fixing it to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

The out ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is inserted into and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to be fitted with the provided positioning protrusion 607, and by fitting the out ball discharge groove 1235 with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 is relatively moved in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is becoming regulated.

In the gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225 and the engaging step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front surfaces of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 on the panel holder 1220 in a conventional obstacle nail planting device without modifying the installation device, thereby suppressing an increase in cost for planting the obstacle nail. You can do it.

Although not shown, the game panel 1200 has a plurality of obstacle nails arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. The front unit 2000 can be attached. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel plate 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, which is a transparent panel. It is possible to embody the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the rear side of the gaming area 1100 is visible to the player through the board 1210, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 in which the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes and the like change depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a replacement part. At the same time, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the gaming board 4 compatible with various models can be configured by replacing only the panel plate 1210. ..

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different from each other, the panel holder 1220 can be a common part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is model-independent, by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It is like this.

[5-7. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. 96 is a detailed front view of the game board. Further, FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 96 as disassembled and seen from the front.

The game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and an outer circumference of a game area 1100 into which a game ball as a game medium is driven by the player operating the handle device 500. And a frame-shaped front component member 1110 for partitioning and forming the front component member 1110 at a lower right corner of the front component member 1110 at a position where it can be viewed from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The function display unit 1180 arranged and a plurality of openings 1158 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in a predetermined shape (FIG. (See 97)), a plate-shaped game panel 1150, a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. There is.

In addition, the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and after the game panel 1150 with respect to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500 inserted from the side, a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect image that is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and that can be visually recognized from the player side according to the game state, A board holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 are provided.

[5-7-1. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 4 is an attacker unit 2100 which is disposed above the outlet 1151 in the lower center of the left and right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a game area on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A side winning opening member 2200 arranged along the outer periphery of 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged on the substantially central portion of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150, Equipped with.

The table unit 2000 is adapted to be attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 after being inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150. The portion projecting to the front side of the game panel 1150 is located in the game area 1100. As a result, the table unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nail planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, the movement of the game ball is prevented. It is possible to add a change. In addition, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[5-7-1a. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 has a plurality of inlets (winning holes) in which the game balls hit into the game area 1100 can be received, and specifically, in the left-right direction. From the upper starting port 2101 disposed below the lower starting port 2102, and the lower starting port 2102 disposed below the upper starting port 2101 Also has a rectangular big winning opening 2103 that greatly extends in the left-right direction, and a general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left and right sides of the big winning opening 2103 and slightly above. The game balls received in the upper starting opening 2101, the lower starting opening 2102, the large winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

The upper start opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, and game balls can be always received (winning). On the other hand, the lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 2106 which can be opened by the starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 98) between the lower starting port 2102 and the upper starting port 2101. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stand up substantially vertically, the upper starting opening 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 can move. When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be received in the lower starting opening 2102. That is, the lower starting opening 2102 is a variable winning opening by the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 based on detection of passage of a game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

The special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened/closed by an opening/closing member 2107 having a horizontally long rectangular shape capable of closing the opening. The opening/closing member 2107 has a lower side rotatably supported, and in a substantially vertical state, it can close the special winning opening 2103 to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side moves to the front side. When it is turned to, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be received. This opening/closing member 2107 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal game state, and a special lottery is performed when a game ball is received in the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 (starting winning). According to the lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”), the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 98) is driven to open and close.

Furthermore, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is open upward as shown in the drawing, and the game balls can be always received (winning).

Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start opening switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received in the lower start opening 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received in the special winning opening 2103. 2110 is further provided, and the game ball detected by the lower start opening switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. In addition, an upper starting opening switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the upper starting opening 2101 and a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2104 are provided in a back unit 3000 described later. ing.

[5-7-1b. Side winning mouth member]
The side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 on the game board 4 is in the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 into which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed, in the lower part of the game panel 1150 leftward from the center in the left-right direction. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and is attached to each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side in front view of the attacker unit 2100. Two general winning openings 2201 are provided so as to face each other. These two general winning openings 2201 are open upward so that game balls can be always received (winning), and the gaming balls received in the general winning openings 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

In addition, the side winning opening member 2200 is arranged at a position such that the left end portion of the side winning opening member 2200 is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end portion. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side with two general winning openings 2201 sandwiched between them and the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (the lower start opening 2102 and the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). It is provided with a second shelf portion 2203 that decreases toward the (2103 side), and the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202 can be brought closer to the center side of the game area 1100. You can do it.

It should be noted that the two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end portion of the first shelf portion 2202, and even if the game balls are moved to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. Further, the upper side between the two general winning openings 2201 is also provided with a third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to be lower toward the center of the game area 1100.

The side winning opening member 2200 is formed to have translucency as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning opening decoration substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decoration board 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the side winning opening member 2200. It is said that they can be illuminated.

[5-7-1c. Center goods]
Further, the center accessory 2300 of the front unit 2000 on the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and then the game panel 1150. As shown in the figure, it is fixed to the front surface, is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view is outside the game ball between the outer periphery of the game area 1100 It is formed in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the diameter is formed, and the outer peripheral surface on the left side is on a substantially straight line hanging down so as to form a region of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game region 1100. Is formed on.

This center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 inclined downward to the left from a position slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the front wall located on the front surface of the game panel 1150. Is provided, and the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2300 when flowing down to the upper shelf 2301, and to the right of the upper shelf 2301. The game ball flowing down (entering) passes through the right side of the center accessory 2300 and flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at a stretch. That is, if the game ball is hit so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf portion 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced, so that the hitting strength of the game ball is increased. It is possible to adjust the length appropriately, and to maintain a sense of tension so that the game can be prevented from becoming a boring game.

Further, the center accessory 2300 has entered the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which the game balls flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. A warp outlet (not shown) that discharges the game ball into the frame, and the game ball discharged from the warp exit is rolled in the left-right direction and then discharged into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100 to be a center character object. The stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side of the frame in 2300 is mainly provided.

Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 has a first stage to which the game ball discharged from the warp exit is supplied and a game ball from the first stage arranged in front of the first stage. It is provided with a second stage which is supplied and is capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the center in the left-right direction of the first stage, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is a chance at the front of the bottom end of the center accessory 2300. It is designed to be discharged from the outlet 2314 into the game area 1100. As shown in the figure, the chance exit 2314 is arranged immediately above the upper start opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball discharged from the chance exit 2314 is highly likely to be accepted into the upper start opening 2101 (winning prize). To do).

The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, the ornamental body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the player side. Has become.

In addition, the center accessory 2300 is transparent on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150, above the warp entrance 2302, and to the left so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112. The arch part 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 and guided to the left side of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf portion 2301 flows down through the rear side of the arch portion 2315 to the downstream side.

Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting passage of a game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 is arranged on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion above the arch portion 2315 and detects a gate entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter, and a game ball entering the gate entrance. It has a gate switch 2352 and a gate outlet for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100. In this embodiment, although not shown in detail, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is the arch. The part 2315 is made to look as if it were submerged.

[5-7-2. Panel lens member]
The panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 penetrates in a front and rear direction in a circle or an X shape at a position outside the opening 1158 into which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150. The plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed as described above are used for light emission decoration. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of transparent upper panel lenses 2510 arranged on the rear side of the surface. An upper panel lens substrate on which LEDs are mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a rear panel lens 2520 are disposed on the rear side. And a lower panel lens substrate having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its surface.

The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 are protruded from the plate-shaped lens base portion to the front and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides having substantially the same shape as the shape of the light emission decoration hole to be inserted. It has a section. When the insertion light guide portion 2502 is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip thereof is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is designed not to affect the game ball as much as possible.

The panel lens member 2500 can cause the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate to emit light as appropriate, so that the region into which the game ball flows down can be illuminated by using an opaque game panel 1150 such as plywood. The decoration of the game panel 1150 that has never been seen can be shown to the player, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made conspicuous to differentiate it from other pachinko gaming machines.

[5-7-3. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and as shown in the figure, supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance rearward. A back box 3001, an upper unit 3002 arranged in the back box 3001 above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character unit 3400 arranged in the back box 3001 on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and in the back box 3001. The gear decoration unit 3500 arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mainly provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged near the lower left front end of the back box 3001 at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A side lamp decoration board 3014, a game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game received in the left general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100. A left guide member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and a right that is arranged on the right side of the left guide member 3016 and that guides the game ball received downward to the upper start opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the right general winning opening 2104. The guide member 3018 is mainly provided.

Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board box having a horizontally long rectangular shape, which is arranged at a lower rear portion of the back box 3001 and accommodates a lamp drive board 4170 (see FIG. 100), and a back box. A panel relay terminal plate 4161 (see FIG. 98) fixed to the rear side of the lamp driving board box 3001 and fixed to the rear side of the lamp driving board box, and a horizontally long rectangular upper resistor arranged on the upper rear side of the back box 3001. It further includes a substrate and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 and detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900.

In the present embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be seen from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 shaped into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be characterized. Further, the back unit 3000 is configured such that each unit 3100, 3400, 3500 can move independently or in association with each other according to the game state, and the movement allows the player to change the game state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of opportunities, etc., and entertain the player.

[5-7-3a. Back box]
The back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 is formed in a box shape with the front side opened, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and the game panel 1150 is provided through the fixing portions 3001a. It is designed to be fixed on the rear side. In addition, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed in the approximate center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be viewed from the player side through the opening. Further, the back box 3001 has mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3014, etc. at appropriate positions.

Although not shown, the back box 3001 is a liquid crystal that inserts and locks one fixing piece 1902 (the right side in the rear view) protruding outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the right side of the opening in the rear view. A liquid crystal display is provided by providing a support portion, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening when viewed from the rear, and the lock member supports the other fixing piece 1902 (the left side when viewed from the rear) of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-7-3b. Induction member]
The left guiding member 3016 in the back unit 3000 guides the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths. It is designed to be discharged, and a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting passage of a game ball is provided in each flow path. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning port 2104 on the right side through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The upper start opening switch 3022 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the upper start opening 2101, and the general winning opening switch 3020 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the general winning opening 2104 on the right side. Further, the right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 below the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-7-3c. Upper unit]
The upper unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is formed in a horizontally long shape as a whole, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 includes a rotary decoration unit 3200 having a circular shape in a front view, which is disposed on the front surface at a substantially center in the left-right direction, and a lifting mechanism which is arranged on the rear side of the rotary decoration unit 3200 and moves the rotary decoration unit 3200 up and down. 3250, a swinging decorative body unit 3300 arranged at the rear side of the elevating mechanism 3250 at approximately the center in the left-right direction, and movable ceiling units 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decorative body unit 3300. ing.

The rotating decorative body unit 3200 of the upper unit 3100 is vertically moved by a lifting mechanism 3250 between a raised position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a lowered position located substantially in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. You can do it. In the rotary ornament unit 3200, a shuriken-shaped rotary ornament arranged on the front surface is rotated, and when the rotary ornament unit 3200 is rotated, the rotation radius of the rotary ornament is expanded by the centrifugal force. It is like this.

In this rotating decorative body unit 3200, not only the rotating decorative body is rotated at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the rotating radius of the entire rotating decorative body is expanded and the appearance is greatly changed. It is possible to make a strong impact on the player, suppress the entertaining of the player and reduce the interest in the game, and attract the player's attention. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to select the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game with being greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

Further, the swinging ornament unit 3300 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with swinging ornaments arranged on the left and right of the rear side thereof so as to be adjacent to the rotating ornament unit 3200 located in the raised position, depending on the game state. The left and right swing ornaments can be simultaneously swung in the left and right directions. Further, the movable ceiling unit 3350 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with plate-shaped ceiling ornaments extending horizontally in the left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. This ceiling ornament is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction around the front end side, and the rear end side of the ceiling ornament is rotated in a descending direction according to the gaming state. Is becoming

[5-7-3d. Character unit]
As shown in the figure, the character unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 is equipped with a character body that is a model of a ninja and has a three-dimensional shape. It is possible to move to the left and right positions. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, the character body is rotated by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction along with the movement.

Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 is configured such that the head can reciprocate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the right arm can reciprocate about an axis extending in the up-down direction. You can do it. With this, by rotating the head back and forth, it is possible to perform an action as if the character is nodding. In addition, by horizontally reciprocating the right arm, it is possible to make the character act as if throwing a shuriken.

[5-7-3e. Gear decoration unit]
The gear decoration unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is provided with gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in a plurality in the up-down direction, and each gear decoration depends on the game state. The body is designed to rotate all at once.

[5-7-4. Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and a predetermined effect image can be displayed according to the game state. There is. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing pieces 1902.

Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with a peripheral board box accommodating the peripheral control board 4140 on the rear side thereof.

[6. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 103. 98 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 98, and FIG. 100 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency which constitute the main board. FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 98, and FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 103 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit.

As shown in FIG. 98, the control structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and is responsible for various controls. First, the main control board 4100 will be described, and then the payout control board 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

[6-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 98, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. , A main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit 4100c to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100d and a RAM clear switch 4100e for completely erasing information stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. .. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”) and a main control built-in RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. The functions of are also built in. Further, the main control MPU 4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM, and the non-volatile RAM has a unique code (only one code exists in the world) for identifying the individual by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. ) Is added to the unique ID code stored in advance. The once-added ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

In FIG. 96, the upper start opening switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting opening 2101, the lower starting opening switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting opening 2102, and the general winning opening 2104 are shown. The detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball entered is first input to the main control input circuit 4100c and then input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b. Further, as shown in FIG. 96, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball entering the general winning opening 2201, and a large winning opening 2103 are entered. A detection switch 2110 for detecting a game ball, and a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting fraud using a magnet are first attached to the game board 4. It is input to the main control input circuit 4100c via the relay terminal board 4161 and is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, so that the start opening solenoid 2105 and the attacker 2105 are connected via the panel relay terminal board 4161. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2108, or a panel relay terminal board 4161 from the main control I/O port 4100b and an upper special symbol display 1185, a lower special symbol display 1186, an upper special symbol memory via the function display board 1191. It outputs a drive signal to the display device 1184, the lower special symbol memory display device 1187, the normal symbol display device 1189, the normal symbol memory display device 1188, the game state display device 1183, and the round display device 1190.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110. As the winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. Gaming balls are also frequently detected. Therefore, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are proximity switches having a long life. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so that the game ball is frequently detected by the count switch 2110. Therefore, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2104, 2201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently does not frequently be detected by the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020. For this reason, the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a serially transmits various kinds of information (game information) related to games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Etc. are received in a serial system. The main control MPU 4100a also sends various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140. Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in a serial manner will be described. The main control MPU 4100a is mainly configured by a main control CPU core 4100aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main control serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I/O ports, etc., connects the bus 4100ah. They are connected via a circuit (see FIG. 107). The main serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100ea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, etc. See 107). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100ea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as the main serial data. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb is 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 104) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100e is also output to the payout control board 4110.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 99, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc. performs a payout control section 4120 for performing various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 654, and a ball feeding by a ball feeding solenoid 585. 67, a firing control unit 4130 for controlling, an error LED display 860c for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 860c, and FIG. The prize ball tank 720, the tank rail 731, and the ball removing switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided. ..

[6-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 99, the payout control unit 4120, which performs various controls related to payout, is a payout control MPU 4120a which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. And a payout control I/O port 4120b as an I/O device and an external watchdog timer 4120c (hereinafter, referred to as “external WDT 4120c”) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4120a is operating normally. ), a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, a payout control input circuit 4120e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, and a CR unit 6. And a CR unit input/output circuit 4120f for exchanging various signals. The payout control MPU 4120a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), and for preventing fraud. Functions are also built in.

The payout control MPU 4120a receives various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port 4120b, and clears the RAM from the main control board 4100. An operation signal (detection signal) of the switch 4100e may be input via the payout control I/O port 4120b.

In FIG. 71, a ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740 and a prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 flow down. The detection signal from the counting switch 751 for detecting the game ball to be input is first input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the prize ball case in-board 754 of the prize ball device 740 and paid out via the payout control I/O port 4120b. It is input to the control MPU 4120a. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first detected by the rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the substrate 754 in the prize ball case. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4120e through the payout control input circuit 4120e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control I/O port 4120b.

The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuit 4120e. Is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I/O port 4120b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 which detects whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the main door relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I/O port 4120b.

The payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I/O 4120b and the prize ball case substrate 754, and the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with an error LED. A signal for displaying on the display device 860c is output to the error LED display device 860c via the payout control I/O port 4120b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is issued. It transmits to the main control board 4100 via the 4120b in a serial manner, or outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port 4120b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

The error LED display 860c is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860c include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board), and when the number “1” is displayed, it means “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the payout rotor 748 is provided at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. And the game ball are engaged with each other in the vicinity of the entrance of the payout rotating body 748 to make it difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it means that "count switch error" (specifically Indicates that there is a problem in the counting switch 751 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it means that “retry error” (specifically, The fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value is notified, and when the number "6" is displayed, it means "full tank" (specifically, from the full tank switch 550). Based on the detection signal, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR unconnected" (dispensing). (Electrical connection is disconnected in any part from the control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock" (specifically, , That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first a frequency display plate 365, a main door relay terminal plate 880, and a terminal for connecting a lending device such as a game ball. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is the CR unit. The payout control I/O port 4120b is received via the input/output circuit 4120f and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to rent the game balls or the like. The device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365 are output, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[6-2-2. Firing controller]
As shown in FIG. 99, the firing control unit 4130, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 585, has a detection control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. 4130a, a transmission circuit 4130b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4130c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. The firing timing control circuit 4130c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4130b so that 100 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d. At the same time, a ball sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit 4130e.

From the touch switch 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger touches the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and the firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4130a via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and then the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then to the firing timing control circuit 4130c. When the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the CR control signal is input to the firing control input circuit 4130a and the firing timing control circuit 4130c. There is. The signal from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 first indicates the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d via the.

Based on the signal from the potentiometer 512, the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d outputs a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506. When the input is made, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e is triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse to supply a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay terminal plate 192. The ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 by outputting, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed. By stopping the output of, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 104) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. .. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-2-3. Exchange of various signals with the terminal connection device for lending equipment such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout controller 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 100, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, and also the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays electrical connections between the boards. The board between the payout control board 4110 and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for playing balls, the board between the CR unit 6 and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for playing balls, and the frequency display plate 365 and the lending device connection terminal for playing balls. The board and the board 869 are electrically connected by wirings (harnesses). In addition, AC24V described later from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC +12V (DC +12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V") in this embodiment) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage creating circuit (not shown), together with the ground LG. It is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frequency display board 365 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls.

The frequency display plate 365 is provided with a ball lending switch 365a, which is a push button switch, at the position corresponding to the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining count display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display portion 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

The ball LG switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is turned on (turned on), and this ball lending operation signal TDS is input to the CR unit 6 through the gaming device lending device connection terminal board 869. It has become so. When the return button 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (turned on), and this return operation signal RES is input to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Is becoming

The residual number display 365c is one in which three segment displays are arranged side by side in a row. Of these three-digit segment displays, one-digit segment display is sequentially driven, that is, a so-called dynamic lighting method is used to display three digits. The segment display of is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the remaining number display 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or an error of the CR unit 6. The residual number display 365c displays the digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating the 1-digit segment display out of the 3-digit segment display and the designated 1-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are input from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the 1-digit segment display unit sequentially emits light in accordance with the inputted digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and the contents due to the light emission of these 3-digit segment display units are left unpaid. It can be seen through the display portion 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d through the terminal device connection terminal board 869 for playing a game ball or the like. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creating circuit, and when the ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display portion 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining number display 365c through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

When the ball lending button 361 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY which is a ball lending request signal. It is designed to output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) through the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, which corresponds to 100 yen in amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or transmitting the fact that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental device connection terminal board for game balls and the like. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. Note that, for example, when the ball renting button 361 is pressed, a game ball for 200 yen is paid out, and when the clerk in the hall or the like presets the CR unit 6, the payout operation is performed once. It is supposed to be performed twice consecutively, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown). It is supposed to be returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of gaming balls dispensed as a result of pressing the ball lending button 361.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 101, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a speaker 821 provided in the main frame 3. And a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that controls sound such as music and sound effects that flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, calendar information that specifies the date, and time that specifies the hour, minute, and second. A real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds information and music or sound effect that flows from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. And a sound volume adjusting volume 4140a for adjusting the sound volume by rotating the knob portion.

[6-3-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control includes a peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and will be described later. A variety of information (for example, the screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined to be continued over the peripheral control unit steady process executed every time the V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is input. Peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores schedule data and information for managing schedule data that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, and various information that continues across days (for example, a jackpot gaming state occurs). Peripheral control SRAM 4150d that stores information for managing history and information for managing special effect flags, and a peripheral control external watchdog for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. And a timer 4150e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 4150e"). The peripheral control RAM 4150c can hold the stored contents only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power from an unillustrated large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board 851. By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 851, when the gaming board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, so the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Can no longer hold and loses its contents. The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control, and when this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, so that it is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. built-in. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp driving board serial I/O port is transmitted to the lamp driving board 4170, The game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the board 4 is output from the motor drive board serial I/O port to the motor drive board 4180. Door-side motor drive data for transmitting to a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a floor signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. To send.

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In addition, the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, which are provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the pressing detection switch 432c for detection is serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is door side serial transmission circuit. From the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 to the operation unit detection serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are provided on the motor drive board 4180, which is not shown in the figure. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e together. Is diagnosed.

[6-3-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 102, the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa as a center, a peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral control various serial I. /O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah, while at the same time, the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 4150ag and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak are read/written via the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 4150b through the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I. DMA0 is a dedicated controller for independently performing data transfer between the I/O port 4150ag and the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control built-in serial I/O ports 4150ae and a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af. , Peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, and other input/output devices for independent data transfer without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. Further, while reading/writing to/from the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, various peripheral control serial I/O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and Reading/writing is performed on the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak through the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I/Os incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, and other input/output devices are independent from each other without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In order to perform data transfer by using the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h are used for reading and writing, and the peripheral control various serial signals are read and written. I/O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150ai , Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h, the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d and various input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, various peripheral control parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak This is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I/O ports 4150ae include lamp drive board serial I/O ports, motor drive board serial I/O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs Serial I/O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I/O port, a main control substrate serial I/O port, and an operation unit information acquisition serial I/O port.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control. When this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that it is not reset.

Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and a game. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. Outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a, or an upper decoration of the door frame 5. The lighting signal of the LED 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286 of the unit 280 is output. As described above, the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED 286b and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED 286b and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED 286b which has a heavy meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED 286b is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and the other LEDs except the LED 286b are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222 provided in the door frame 5 are controlled by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6. , 262 to play music and sound effects. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraudulent activity on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game production, etc. (For example, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered as a more powerful one, or there is a high possibility that the player is in a gaming state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The volume from mute to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-described seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 are provided. Although sound effects such as music and sound effects flowing from 130, 222, and 262 are reduced, a large volume (in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is conducting an illegal act). , The maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with the music or the sound effect. Announces that it is highly possible to increase the volume of sound played to increase the volume of music and sound effects and to produce a more powerful screen on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

[6-3-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and sound generation schedule for generating music and sound effects. There are data, electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arraying light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the plurality of tracks in the internal sound source, the track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

In addition, various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and may be executed. In some cases, the copied one is read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM 4150b includes a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. ing. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when an LED type backlight is mounted on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM 4165, and the acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and is currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, is included in the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed first based on the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time. If June has already passed from the date and time when the power is turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, a brightness of 80% is obtained by adding 5% which is the acquired correction information to 75%. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on by adjusting the brightness and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on for the first time and 12 months have already passed, the corresponding correction information from the peripheral control ROM 4150b ( For example, when 10%) is acquired and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, only the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75%. Further, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the added brightness becomes 85%.

[6-3-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
The peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150ca that stores exclusively backup target information among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. Various control program copy area 4150cd for exclusively storing the copied data, and various control data for exclusively storing a copy of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. A copy area 4150ce and a backup non-management target work area 4150cf for specially storing information that is not a backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs are provided. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, the power-on command (see FIG. 119) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect and When it is for instructing the start of each state effect (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 98 is operated), it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 4150ca is performance information (various information that is updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, is input. Bank0 (1fr), which stores 1fr) as a backup target, and performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0(1fr) and Bank0(1ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is referred to as “Bank”. The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Further, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted when the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the V blank signal that conveys the fact is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, every one frame (1 frame). Therefore, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” have the same meanings (the same applies to the effect information (1fr) and effect backup information (1fr) described later). “(1 ms)” means that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as will be described later, and thus “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, "Bank3" and "Bank4" are added respectively (the same meaning is used for effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) described later).

In Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is set. A door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is a storage area in which a reception command storage area 4150cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 and stores the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a to be described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae is set. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, or in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. There are also things that are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. Has been. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. A storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided in the game board 4. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area in which the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. Of the dial operation unit 401 (rotation direction), operation of the push operation unit 405, and the like (for example, the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). This is a storage area in which the rotation (rotation direction) history information of, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like are set.

It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is set to the game board side emission data SL-DAT in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control section steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in this peripheral control section steady process, When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed last time, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Is becoming

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -When DAT is set and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process of this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like this.

Next, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing the copied copy of the production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content which is copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and is stored in Bank0 (1ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. As the production backup information (1 ms), each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac controls the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb manages two pairs of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), which are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. It is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), which is one pair in total. The backup second area 4150cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each frame (1frame) in the peripheral control unit. Contents that are copied at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc each time the regular processing is executed, and are also stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. The production information (1ms) is, as production backup information (1ms), every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is designed to perform high-speed copying, but the programs for executing the high-speed copy by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[6-3-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da for exclusively storing the backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are the power-on command (see FIG. 119) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on (including power failure due to momentary power failure or power failure). Even when instructing the start of the clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 98 is operated), zero clear is performed. Not done. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are zero-cleared. Further, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the dial operation unit 401 or the push operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, etc.) While it can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 4150da is effect information (SRAM) that is various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state and a special effect flag). Information (for example, information) is exclusively stored as a backup target and is configured from Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit indicating the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Further, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. Since "(SRAM)" is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank4” (also used in the same meaning for effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later).

Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc that exclusively store the copied copy of the effect information (SRAM) that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. Performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 4150db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The backup second area 4150dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the backup second area 4150db. 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[6-3-2. LCD and sound controller]
A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and sound control such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, As shown in FIG. 101, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”), and a VDP with built-in sound source for controlling drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 ( Video Display Processor 4160a, a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, serialized music and An audio data transmission IC 4160c that transmits sound effects and the like as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the first screen data is generated according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae when a V blank signal described later is input. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, outputs the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Then, the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, a V blank signal is input, and the first sound is generated according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next sound command data following the command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data as the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Each time, the sound command data at the beginning is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one.

[6-3-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a uses a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. VRAM for extracting character data from the above to generate sprite data and generating drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). )doing. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the VDP 4160a with the built-in sound source, the VDP 4160a with the built-in sound source displays the liquid crystal and Character data is extracted from the sound control ROM 4160b to generate sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is generated on the built-in VRAM, and the generated drawing data is generated for the channel CH1. Output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. That is, the “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” is data for generating drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the built-in VRAM. ..

Further, when the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900, a V blank signal notifying that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. To the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change.

Note that the sound source built-in VDP 4160a adopts a frame buffer method. The "frame buffer method" means that one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) and held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM). In this method, drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. 103(a). By extracting the sound data such as music and sound effects, and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and the output channel number The output channel to be used in accordance with the above is set, and music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. To do. It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the sound for notifying the clerk in the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A sub-volume value that adjusts is incorporated. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-mentioned substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by moving to the setting mode described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. .. Further, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels of the internal sound source of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of output volumes of the built-in sound source of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the master volume value, which is the volume that flows from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized to produce audio data as audio data. The data is output to the transmission IC 4160c. In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the speaker 821 and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume that flows from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume adjustment volume 4140a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually combined with the speaker 821 and the door provided in the main body frame 3. Amplification is performed up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the frame 5, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used, and volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume and the volume of this combined notification sound are actually independent of the volume of the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. To the master volume value, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Here, when the effect sound is output from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. To briefly explain the control that sends the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall, first, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated to mute, and the track in which this effect sound is incorporated. Sound data, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume. The volume of the effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to a master volume value that is a volume that flows from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, and this amplification is performed. The produced sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. That is, actually, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, but the effect sound is the above-described sound generation schedule data. Is proceeding according to. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 only for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and the predetermined period elapses. Then, the volume of the effect sound that has been proceeding in accordance with the sound generation schedule data that has been forced to be muted up to now is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the substrate volume is adjusted to the sub volume value. Is set again (at this time, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated to shift to the setting mode and is adjusted, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. The speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 are designed to flow. In this way, when the effect sound is being output from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraud on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is caused. When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the action, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is output from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. Although the sound is produced, the muffled effect sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data. Therefore, after a predetermined period of the notification sound, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, When it stops flowing from 222, 262, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but flows from the point where the notification sound started to flow according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed. It's set to start.

[6-3-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 103(a), the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b pre-stores various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and announcement sounds in addition to an extremely large amount of character data.

[6-3-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as serial data of the differential method in which the right signal is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method in which it is a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 stereoscopically reproduce music and sound effects suitable for various effects. The audio data transmitting IC 4160c outputs audio data as differential data serial data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, it is possible to take measures against noise.

[6-3-2d. VDP with built-in sound source in door frame according to second embodiment]
Subsequently, in the door frame 5 according to the above-described first embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays on the liquid crystal display device 1900 provided on the game board 4 (herein, referred to as "game board side liquid crystal display device 1900"). When one screen (one frame) of screen data to be output is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data. Then, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is generated in the built-in VRAM, and the generated drawing data is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Regarding the drawing control of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 55, in addition to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in the figure, in the component code|symbol which concerns on the door frame 5'which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, the component which has the same function as the component which concerns on the door frame 5 which concerns on 1st Embodiment shown to FIG. 103 (a) is the same. Numbered.

First, the big difference between the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment and the door frame 5 according to the first embodiment is that in the door frame 5 according to the first embodiment, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source is a game board side liquid crystal display device. While drawing data is output to 1900, in the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a synchronizes the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The point of outputting drawing data to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and in the door frame 5 according to the first embodiment, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 of the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. Character data for drawing in the display area is stored in advance, whereas in the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment, it is drawn in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. That is, the game board side character data and the upper plate side character data for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are stored in advance.

In the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a that controls the drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Based on the input screen data, the game board side character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data, and one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Built-in drawing data and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 by extracting the upper plate side character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data. Image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, which is generated on the VRAM, is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is generated. Is output from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to synchronize the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. When the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channels CH1 and CH2 to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the fact that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is transmitted. The V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

[6-3-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 101, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). As a result, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above. A liquid crystal display device 1900 can be used to unfold based effects. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and on New Year's Eve, the screen for performing the New Year countdown is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Can be mentioned. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED type backlight. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the currently set liquid crystal display device 1900. And the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the. In addition to the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the date, hour, minute, and second information initially stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored. Further, when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is of a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to perform ON/OFF control of the backlight or only to turn it ON. Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date/time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the manufacturing line, various tests such as a display test of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are performed. Is set to the manufacturing date and time.

Thus, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes the brightness setting information and the input date/time information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type, and the pachinko game. It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the machine type information of the machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at low probability or high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or dark depending on the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. In some cases it may be overdone. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43, it becomes possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. There is. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is supposed to be displayed in. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, it is possible to reset the calendar information and the time information and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a desired brightness. it can. The adjusted desired brightness is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information. In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the LED type, the liquid crystal display device 1900 changes with time. Corrects the decrease in brightness due to. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the input date/time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date/time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and displays the calendar information and the hour/minute/second to identify the date. Luminance adjustment information for obtaining the specified time information, identifying the current date and time, and adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments. And the brightness setting information having the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. For example, when 6 months have already passed from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time, it is determined from the peripheral control ROM 4150b when 6 months have already passed from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. When correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the correction information is acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5% to 80%. If December has already passed since the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. When the backlight of the display device 1900 is turned on, based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, a brightness of 85% is obtained by adding 10% which is the acquired correction information to the 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on. Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and it will be described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[6-3-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 4140a has a knob for rotating the volume of music, sound effect, etc. flowing from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. Can be adjusted by. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is pivotally operated, and the peripherally controlled A/D converter 4150ak electrically connected to the knob portion 4140a is a knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222 provided in the door frame 5 are controlled by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6. , 262 to play music and sound effects. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent activity on the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announce contents related to game production (for example, produce a more powerful screen on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or announce that there is a high possibility that the game state will be advantageous to the player) Sound from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are used for volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a structure that flows without any dependence, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven levels of the substrate volume, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 are provided. Although sound effects such as music and sound effects flowing from 130, 222, and 262 are reduced, a large volume (in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is conducting an illegal act). , The maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming liable to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with the music or the sound effect. Announces that it is highly possible to increase the volume of sound played to increase the volume of music and sound effects and to produce a more powerful screen on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

In the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and in addition to the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effect. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is supposed to be displayed in. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and Then, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. .. The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is included among a plurality of tracks in the sound source with built-in sound source VDP4160a, and the effect sound is changed. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame 3 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the store clerk in the hall can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may be difficult to hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel large and feel the music or the sound effect noisy. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, within a predetermined time, the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operating unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for a demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the operation is performed according to the screen of the setting mode. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the unit 400, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. With this, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when the clerk in the hall feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear the music and the sound effect, the operation unit 400 It is possible to increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired volume.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined period of time, becomes a customer waiting state, and is repeatedly demonstrated by the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, 10 times), the last time. The volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was seated in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play the game and feels the adjusted volume is small and cannot hear the music or the sound effect, A player who sits down to play a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the push operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, sit down on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play the game. When the player who is playing the game feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music and the sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game this time is the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400. It is possible to reduce the volume to a desired volume by operating the 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[7. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. 104 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 105 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 104. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. Although not shown, the grounds of the various boards and the grounds of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply board 851.

[7-1. Power board]
The power board 851 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the Pachinko island facility. When the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 80 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

As shown in FIG. 104, the power supply board 851 includes a full-wave rectification circuit 851a, a power factor correction circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a +5.2V creation circuit 851d, a +5.25V creation circuit 851e, a +12V creation circuit 851f, and a +24V creation. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectifier circuit 851a full-wave rectifies the AC 24 V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies the power factor correction circuit 851b. The power factor correction circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power to create a direct current +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. The smoothing circuit 851c removes an input +37V ripple to smooth +37V to +5.2V creating circuit 851d, +5.25V creating circuit 851e, +12V creating circuit 851f, +24V creating circuit 851g, and payout control board. 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The +5.2V creating circuit 851d creates a direct current +5.2V (DC+5.2V, hereinafter referred to as "+5.2V") from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which +5.2V is applied and supplied serves as a +5.2V power supply line. The +5.25V creating circuit 851e creates a direct current +5.25V (DC+5.25V, hereinafter referred to as "+5.25V") from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which +5.25 V is applied and supplied becomes a +5.25 V power supply line. The +12V creation circuit 851f creates a direct current +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as “+12V”) from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied serves as a +12V power supply line. The +24V creation circuit 851g creates a direct current +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied serves as a +24V power supply line. The voltages created by the +5.2V creation circuit 851d, the +12V creation circuit 851f, and the +24V creation circuit 851g are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and are supplied by the +5.25V creation circuit 851e, the +12V creation circuit 851f, and the +24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. In addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a, the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is also supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 851.

In addition, the power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source for the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. It is a backup power source for RAM (RAM with payout control).

The +5.2V generated by the +5.2V generation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, as described later. The +5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and also to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The +5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and also to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

The minus terminal (hereinafter, referred to as “−terminal of capacitor BC1”) of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 is grounded to the ground, while its plus terminal (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, as for the electric power from the +5.2V generation circuit 851d, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode PD0 and the + terminal of the capacitor BC1. The current flows toward the. Thus, the capacitor BC1 is +5.2V generated by the +5.2V generation circuit 851d by the electrical connection method in which the +5.2V is returned to the payout control board 4110 and then again from the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. A voltage of 2V is applied so that the battery can be charged. As a result, when the power from the +5.2V generation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a due to the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, the memory contents are held by the payout VBB being applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM. It has become so.

The minus terminal (hereinafter, referred to as “−terminal of capacitor BC0”) of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 is grounded to the ground, while its plus terminal (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of the capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, as for the power from the +5.2V generation circuit 851d, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control internal RAM, which is the forward direction by the diode MD0, and the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. The current flows toward the. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is an electrical circuit in which +5.2V generated by the +5.2V generation circuit 851d returns from the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the power supply board 851 again to the power supply board 851. Depending on the connection method, +5.2V is applied and charging is possible. As a result, when the power from the +5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the main control board 4100, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a due to the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM to retain the stored contents. It has become so.

[7-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be mainly described.

Three types of voltages of +5.2V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as shown in FIG. 104, and the main control board 4110 is supplied via the payout control board 4110. It is also supplied to the 4100. Further, four types of voltages of +5.25V, +12V, +24V, and +37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board is supplied via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. While being supplied to the 4140, three kinds of voltages of +5.25V, +12V, and +24V among the four kinds of voltages are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The four types of voltages of +5.25V, +12V, +24V, and +37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are, as shown in FIG. 105(a), +5.25V, +12V, and Three types of voltage of +24V are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170, and various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal are output from the lamp drive circuit 4170a to various decorative boards of the game board 4. , The four types of voltages are supplied to the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a outputs drive signals to electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid of the game board 4. Further, of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages of +24V and +37V are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a whose drawing is controlled and a backlight power source which is a power source for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. +24V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a and +37V is the backlight. It is supplied with power. On the other hand, three kinds of voltages of +5.25V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 105(b). Of the three types of voltage, +12V is supplied to the +9V creating circuit 194a to create a direct current +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as “+9V”). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 supplies four kinds of voltages including +9V created by the +9V creation circuit 194a to various decoration boards of the door frame 5 in addition to the three kinds of voltages.

[7-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 104, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control MPU 4120a and the like, a payout control filter circuit 4110a, and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. The supply control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with +5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from this +5.2V. The +5.2V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode PD0 and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure notification when detecting signs of +12V and +24V power failure or momentary power failure. This power failure notice signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted via the peripheral control board 4140 as shown in FIGS. Of the door frame 5 through the frame peripheral drive terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. It is designed to be transmitted to decorative boards.

In addition to +12V and +24V being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, +12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4120e of the payout control unit 4120, and +24V is, for example, payout of the payout control unit 4120. It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4120d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply board 851 is not used in the payout control board 4110 at all and is directly supplied to the firing power supply board 831 via the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply board 831 creates a predetermined voltage described later from the supplied +37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the firing control unit 4130.

As described above, by providing the power outage monitoring circuit 4110b on the payout control board 4110 on the main body frame 3 side, it is not necessary to mount the power outage monitoring circuit 4110b every time when the game board 4 is manufactured. Can contribute to reduction.

Here, in the present embodiment, the reason why the payout control board 4110 is provided with the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be briefly described. +5.2V, +12V, and +24V from the power supply board 851 are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 as described above. In other words, +5.2V, +12V, and +24V from the power supply board 851 provided on the body frame 3 side are the closest to the main control board 4100 provided on the game board 4 side as a transmission path. It is supplied through the payout control board 4110 provided on the third side. As a result, as compared with the case where the power supply board 851 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit, it is possible to monitor the signs of +12V and +24V power failure or momentary power failure in a relationship closer to the main control board 4100 as a transmission path. By making the transmission path for transmitting the advance notice signal to the main control board 4100 short, it is possible to contribute to speeding up the timing at which the main control board 4100 starts backing up important game information. Further, by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power supply lines, the +12V power supply line and the +24V power supply line, respectively, the voltage applied to one of the +12V power supply line and the +24V power supply line is monitored. Compared with the case, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure. In addition, recent pachinko game machines provide players with vibrant and powerful presentations by providing an extremely large number of electric decorations on the door frame, game board, etc. It tends to increase. Along with this, power consumption is also increasing, and opportunities for improving the power supply board are increasing. On the other hand, since the payout control board is a board that exclusively performs the payout operation of the game balls, there is very little opportunity to remake it unless there is a major improvement in the payout system. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the reason described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is not provided in the power supply board 851 but is provided in the payout control board 4110.

[7-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 104, the main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a and the like, and also a main control filter circuit 4100g. The main control filter circuit 4100g is supplied with +5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this +5.2V. The +5.2V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode MD0 and is also supplied to the main control MPU 4100a and the like, for example. +12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 4100c, and +24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d.

[7-2-3. Voltage supplied to the firing power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 104, the emission power supply substrate 831 includes a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF)). The DC/DC converter 831a steps down +37V from the payout control board 4110 to generate direct current +35V (DC+35V, hereinafter referred to as “+35V”) and drives the firing solenoid of the firing control unit 4130 on the payout control board 4110. It is supplied to the circuit 4130d.

The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as "-terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC0") is grounded to the ground, while its positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as "+ terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC0"). Are electrically connected to the +35V output terminal of the DC/DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying +35V output from the DC/DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, the merged current obtained by merging the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is made to flow to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110. Has become. The detailed description will be given later.

As described above, +5.2V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, whereas +5.25V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. There is. +5.2V and +5.25V are control reference voltages of the respective control boards, but when electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via a wire (harness), the total length of the wires, that is, For the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, which have short power supply paths, the voltage drop (voltage drop) associated with the wiring can be estimated to be small, and therefore +5.2 V is supplied from the power supply board 851. On the other hand, in addition to the peripheral control board 4140 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 in which the total length of the wiring, that is, the power supply path is longer than that of the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, it is dependent on the peripheral control board 4140. Since the voltage drop (voltage drop) associated with the wiring cannot be ignored for the lamp drive board 4170, the door drive frame side decoration board that depends on the motor drive board 4180 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the like. The power supply board 851 supplies +5.25V, which is a voltage higher than +5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100.

[8. Main control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. 106 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, and FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 4100g shown in FIG. 104 will be described, and subsequently, the power supply, the main control system reset IC, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, and the main control I/O port created on the main control board 4100. Various input/output signals such as 4100b and communication interface circuits between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 106, the main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control I/O port 4100b, a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, and a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal as a peripheral circuit. A main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 MHz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal is mainly configured.

[8-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 106, the main control filter circuit 4100g mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, +5.2V is applied to the first terminal from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 104 through the payout control board 4110, and the second terminal is grounded. +5.2V from which the noise component is removed is output from the No. terminal. The +5.2V applied to the first terminal is smoothed by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the electrolytic capacitor MC0 grounded to the ground (GND).

The +5.2V output from the third terminal is further smoothed with ripples removed by the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) grounded to the ground. Has been converted. This smoothed +5.2V is the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the main control I/O port 4100b. Are applied to the VCC terminal, which is a power supply terminal, and the like.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC3, and the VCC terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC4. The ripples of +5.2V input to the and VCC terminals are further removed and smoothed. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b is grounded to the ground.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and is also electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC5. ing. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the capacitor MC5, and is also electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 104 via the resistor MR0. Connected to each other. That is, +5.2V, which is the noise component removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 4100g, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0 to the VBB terminal of the main control internal RAM, The voltage is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. As a result, as described above, when the power from the +5.2 V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 104 is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is the main VBB. Since the current is blocked by the diode MD0 from flowing into the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, it does not operate on the VBB terminal of the main control internal RAM. The memory contents are retained by applying the main VBB.

[8-2. Main control system reset IC]
As shown in FIG. 106, +5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I/O port 4100b, and has a built-in delay circuit. A capacitor MC6 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC6. .. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed when +5.2V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b. The output terminal is an open collector output type and is pulled up to the +5.2V side by a pull-up resistor MR1. The voltage pulled up to the +5.2 V side is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (the capacitor MC7 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes HI and the SRST terminal of the main control MPU4100a and the main control I/O. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the RESETN terminal of the O port 4100b, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is RESET terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and RESETN of the main control I/O port 4100b. Input to the terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I/O The O port 4100b is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground and the grounded capacitor MC8, and +5.2V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant, and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[8-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 106, +5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the ground and the grounded capacitor MC9, and +5.2V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The smoothed +5.2V is also input to the output frequency selection terminals A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal in addition to the VDD terminal. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5.2 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and receives the clock signal of 24 MHz. The main control MPU 4100a, to which this clock signal is input, outputs the clock signal from its E terminal. The E terminal is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b, and receives the 24 MHz clock signal output from the E terminal. The distance between the E terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the CLK terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground, and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. ing.

[8-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100c outputs detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition, it is a circuit to which the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e and the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 104 are input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input and the circuit to which the power failure notice signal is input will be described here. ..

[8-4-1. Circuit to which detection signal from RAM clear switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 106, the third pin as the output pin of the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR3 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR4. Connected to each other. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR4 and also electrically connected to the resistor MR5 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR6 and electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the input port PA of the main control I/O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The first and second pins of the RAM clear switch 4100e are grounded and the fourth pin is electrically connected to the third pin. As a result, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the third pin and the fourth pin are pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR3, while the third pin is operated when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated. The 4th and 4th pins are electrically connected to the 1st and 2nd pins and are pulled down to the ground side.

The circuit composed of the transistor MTR0 and the resistors MR4 and MR5 is a switch circuit. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the voltage pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR3 is the base terminal of the transistor MTR0. Is applied to turn on the transistor MTR0 and turn on the switch circuit. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I/O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground side, so that the transistor MTR0 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR6 and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I/O port 4100b. To be done.

[8-4-2. Circuit to which power failure notice signal is input]
As shown in FIG. 106, the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 via the resistor MR8. Connected to each other. The base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is electrically connected to the resistor MR8 and also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor MR9. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR10 and electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the input port PA of the main control I/O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b that outputs a power failure warning signal is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded, and is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7. Thus, when the power failure notice signal is not input, the pull-up resistor MR7 pulls it to the +12V side, and when the power failure notice signal is input, it is pulled down to the ground side.

The circuit composed of the transistor MTR1 and the resistors MR8 and MR9 is a switch circuit, and the voltage pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR7 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 when the power failure notice signal is not input. By being applied, the transistor MTR1 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the power failure notice signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the main control I/O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled down to the ground side, whereby the transistor MTR1 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR10 and the logic becomes HI. The power failure notice signal 1 is input to the input pin PA1 of the main control I/O port 4100b. Is entered.

The detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, whereas the power failure notice signal is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7. This is because the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input to the main control board 4100, while the power failure notice signal is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage of +5.2 V or more is applied. Also uses +12V, which is a high voltage, to improve the signal reliability. Accordingly, the detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, and the lower starting opening switch 2109, which are input to the main control board 4100, are pulled up like the detection signals from the RAM clear switch 4100e. Detection from the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352, which is input through the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. 98 while being pulled up to +5.2 V side by the resistance. The signal is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor, similarly to the power failure notice signal from the payout control board 4110.

[8-5. Various input/output signals such as main control I/O port]
Next, various input/output signals of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I/O port 4100b will be described. The data input/output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control I/O port 4100b exchange various information and various signals with the data input/output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control MPU 4100a via a data bus.

The RXA terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the main control MPU 4100a receives the serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 as the payer serial data reception signal. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the main control MPU 4100a, output serial data to be sent to the payout control board 4110 as a main pay serial data transmission signal from the TXA terminal, and from the TXB terminal to FIG. The serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 shown is output as a main-circulation serial data transmission signal.

To the input pin PA2 of the input port PA of the main control I/O port 4100b, the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 for notifying the normal reception of the main pay serial data reception signal is input. Of the other input pins of the input port PA and the ports set as the input ports among the other input pins of the input port PA and the input pins of the ports PB to PE, for example, the upper starting opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. Detection signals from various switches such as the above are input through the main control input circuit 4100c. The various detection signals input to the main control I/O port 4100b are input to the main control MPU 4100a via the data bus.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a main payment ACK signal indicating the normal reception completion of the above-mentioned payment master serial data reception signal from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the main control I/O port 4100b via the data bus. Then, of the ports PB to PE, the drive signal from the output pin of the port set as the output port to the starting opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 98 is passed through the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d. It outputs or outputs a drive signal to various indicators such as the upper special symbol indicator 1185 shown in FIG.

[8-6. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with +12V and +5.2V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 104 via the payout control board 4110. The main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise that enters a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress the noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using +12V which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5.2V.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, the main control board 4100 mainly includes pull-up resistors MR20, resistors MR21 and MR22, and a transistor MTR20 as a communication interface circuit. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 4140, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC are built in as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly composed of.

+12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD20 of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 and the negative terminal are grounded to the electrolytic capacitor. It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the MC 20 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)). The cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, when the power from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 104 is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is The charged electric charge can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 as +12V.

Here, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 106 when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs. Since the electric charge is applied as +5.2V, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 by the applied +5.2V is at least the main control MPU 4100a built-in main signal. The main serial data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the serial transmission port 4100ae can be completely transmitted. As described above, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using +12V which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5.2V. That is, when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the main control MPU 4100a can complete the transmission of the main frequency serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission section, but this main frequency serial data is used as the control reference. Even if the main frequency serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 by the voltage +5.2V, the main frequency serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 by +12V. Cannot be output. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140. The main frequency serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission unit of the main control MPU 4100a can be output from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 as a main frequency serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V. There is. As a result, the main circumference serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is securely received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being cut off. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (3rd terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistance AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistance for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main-circulation serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 106 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR20, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR21. It is electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR21, and also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor MR22. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground side. The transistor MTR20 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR20, the transistor MTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. Will be done. As a result, a forward current flows in the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5.2V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is a negative terminal. Is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 which is grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and also to the Vcc terminal (6th terminal) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC is +5 due to the pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. .2V is pulled up and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main-circulation serial data transmission signal for the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a. Input to the input terminal of. As a result, as described above, in the case where the power from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5.2V. When +5.2V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or an instantaneous blackout occurs, at least the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is: The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main-circulation serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a can complete the transmission, and the main-circulation serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main-circulation serial Data is securely received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being shredded or lost.

When the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground side and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. By doing so, since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. While the transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is LOW. When it is, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5.2V from the pull-up resistor MR20 and the transistor MTR20 is turned on, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the AIC 10 is pulled down to the ground side, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. As described above, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. Is the logic of.

As described above, in this embodiment, +5.2V supplied to various electronic components via the main control filter circuit unit 4100g, that is, +5.2V which is the reference control voltage generated by the +5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply substrate 851. A +5.2V power supply line to which 2V is applied and a +12V power supply line applied via the diode M20, that is, a +12V power supply line to which +12V created by the +12V creation circuit 851f is applied as a communication control voltage, have a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. Measures are taken when the reference control voltage and the communication control voltage are generated and dropped. That is, for the main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, the +5.2V power supply line and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit unit 4100g as the first auxiliary power supply are added. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the reference control voltage applied from the +5.2V power supply line drops due to the electrical parallel connection between the terminal and the terminal, the main control filter that is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the reference control voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the circuit unit 4100g, the state in which the reference control voltage is applied can be maintained, and the pull-up resistor MR20 and the resistor MR21 are maintained. , MR22 and the transistor MTR20, +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode M20 as a communication control voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 and the second terminal By electrically connecting the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, which is an auxiliary power source, in parallel, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the communication control voltage applied from the +12V power source line via the diode MD20 decreases. Also, by applying the communication control voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, which is the second auxiliary power source, the state in which the communication control voltage is applied can be maintained. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent fragmentation of the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 and to prevent the command from being lost. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main-circulation serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are used as main-circulation serial data, and are composed of pull-up resistors MR20, MR21, MR22, and a transistor MTR20. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is set to 470 μF and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is set to 220 μF so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the interface circuit. As a result, even if a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are all processed as main circumference serial data via the interface circuit. Since the transmission to the control board 4140 can be completed, the peripheral control board 4140 can surely receive the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without breaking them and without missing them.

[9. Discharge control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 99 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 113. 108 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, FIG. 109 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit, etc., FIG. 110 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, and FIG. 111 is a CR unit input/output. 112 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram showing a firing control input circuit, and FIG. 113 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. is there. First, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be described, and then the payout control filter circuit 4110a, the payout control unit 4120 unit circuit, the firing control unit 4130 circuit, various input/output signals with the main control board 4100, and the external terminal board 784 will be described. The various output signals of will be described.

[9-1. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 104, +24V, +12V, and +5.2V are supplied to the payout control board 4110 from the power supply board 851, and +24V and +12V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. The power outage monitoring circuit 4110b monitors the signs of +24V and +12V power outages or instantaneous blackouts, and when detecting the signs of power outages or instantaneous blackouts, a power outage notification signal is output as a power outage notice, and the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. In addition, it outputs to the main control MPU 4100a. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and subsequently, the monitoring of +24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the monitoring of +12V power failure or instantaneous power failure will be described.

[9-1-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, an open collector output type comparator PIC21, a D type flip-flop PIC22, and a transistor PTR20 (2SC1815 in this embodiment). There is.

To the REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, +5.2V is applied through the resistor PR20, and the current input to the REF terminal is the resistor PR20. Is restricted by. The K terminal outputs the reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) which is the comparison reference voltage of the comparator PIC21. The reference voltage Vref is smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC20 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC20 also serves as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

The comparator PIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (PIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of +24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the monitor voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the + terminal. The reference voltage Vref is input to the − terminal. The other one (PIC21B) is used for comparing the monitor voltage V2 of +12V and the reference voltage Vref, the monitor voltage V2 of +12V is input to the + terminal, and the reference voltage Vref is input to the-terminal. There is. The results of these comparisons are input to the D type flip-flop PIC22. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (PIC23A) is used in this embodiment. Note that +5.2V input to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator PIC21 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC21 grounded to the ground. The +5.2V input to the D-type flip-flop PIC22 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC22 that is grounded.

[9-1-2. +24V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure is monitored by the PIC 21A of the comparator PIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 108, +24V is distributed by the resistance ratio of the resistors PR21 and PR22, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC23 grounded to the ground, and the voltage is input to the + terminal of the PIC21A (the capacitor PC23 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR21 and PR22 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (21.40V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of +24V starts a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from +24V. Then, the monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the voltage of +24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW, but since the comparator PIC21 is the open collector output type as described above, It is pulled up to +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, its logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded to the ground, and the ripple is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 (capacitor). The PC 24 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitor voltage V1 of +24V is higher than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 99 is performed from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure warning signal 1 is not output to the I/O port 4120b.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI, but since the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type, the logic Becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded to the ground, and the ripple is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitor voltage V1 of +24V is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure notice signal 1 is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 to the payout control I/O port 4120b. Is output.

[9-1-3. +12V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the PIC 21B of the comparator PIC21 monitors the +12V power failure or the instantaneous power failure by comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 108, +12V is voltage-distributed by the resistance ratio of the resistors PR24 and PR25, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC25 grounded to the ground, and the voltage is input to the + terminal of the PIC21B (the capacitor PC25 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR24 and PR25 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of +12V starts a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from +12V. Then, the monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the voltage of +12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitor voltage V2 of +12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW, but since the comparator PIC21 is the open collector output type as described above, It is pulled up to +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, its logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded to the ground, and it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitor voltage V2 of +12V is higher than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 99 is performed from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure warning signal 1 is not output to the I/O port 4120b.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI, but since the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type, the logic becomes It becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 which is grounded, and the ripple is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitor voltage V2 of +12V is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure notice signal 1 is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 to the payout control I/O port 4120b. Is output.

The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR26. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR27. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor MR7 of the main control input circuit 4100c shown in FIG. 106 via a wiring (harness). Therefore, the signal output from the 1Q terminal is pulled up to the +12V side and transmitted to the main control board 4100 as a power failure notice signal. That is, the transistor PTR20 is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded. Thus, between the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 and the input terminal of the payout control I/O port 4100b, the D type flip-flop PIC22 and the payout control I/O port 4100b are paid out. Since it is mounted on the control board 4110, the power outage warning signal 1 which is an ON/OFF signal using +5.2V which is the control reference voltage gives a power outage warning, whereas the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the ON/OFF using +12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage +5.2V, is used. A power failure warning signal, which is an OFF signal, is used to notify the power failure.

A power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22, from the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 99 via the payout control I/O port 4210b. It is like this. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a is input to the CLR terminal via the payout control I/O port 4210b in the logic LOW state. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted to an output terminal. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I/O port 4210b and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 sets the latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal. The 1D terminal which is the D input terminal, the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal are grounded. The negative logic 1Q terminal, which is the inverted logic of the 1Q terminal, is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-2. Discharge control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 109, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The pay-out control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. In the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, +5.2V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 104 is applied to its first terminal, its second terminal is grounded, and the noise component is removed from its third terminal. +5.2V is output. The +5.2V applied to the first terminal is smoothed by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the electrolytic capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND).

The +5.2V output from the third terminal is further smoothed with ripples removed by the capacitors PC1 and PC2, which are grounded to the ground. The smoothed +5.2V is the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and the payout control I/O port. It is applied to the VCC terminal or the like which is a power supply terminal of 4120b.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC3, and the VCC terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC4 and the VDD terminal. The ripples of +5.2V input to the and VCC terminals are further removed and smoothed. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b is grounded to the ground.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and also electrically connected to a capacitor PC5 which is grounded. ing. The VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the capacitor PC5, and is also electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 104 via the resistor PR0. Connected to each other. That is, +5.2 V, which has been smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a, is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control RAM. It is adapted to be applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1. As a result, as described above, when the power from the +5.2 V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 104 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid out VBB. Since the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM does not operate. The memory contents are retained by applying the payout VBB.

[9-3. Circuit of payout controller]
As shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, the payout control unit 4120 includes a payout control MPU 4120a, a payout control I/O port 4120b, an external WDT 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, a payout control input circuit 4120e, and a CR unit input/output circuit 4120f. In addition, as the peripheral circuit, a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (in the present embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) is mainly configured. Here, first, the external WDT 4120c will be described, and subsequently, various input/output signals such as the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, the payout control input circuit 4120e, the CR unit input/output circuit 4120f, and the main control I/O port, Various input/output signals such as the payout control I/O port will be described.

[9-3-1. External WDT (External Watchdog Timer)]
As shown in FIG. 109, +5.2 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c. The external WDT 4120c resets the payout control MPU 4120a and has a watchdog timer built therein. The external WDT 4120c has a function of monitoring the voltage of +5.2V input to the Vcc terminal and a function of monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4120a is operating normally, and is input to the Vcc terminal. When the voltage of +5.2V reaches the threshold value (in this embodiment, it is set to 4.2V), a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal or the payout control I/O is issued from the payout control MPU 4120a. If the external WDT clear signal is not input to the CK terminal within the clear signal release time via the O port 4120b, the reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal.

The TC terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC6, and the RCT terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR1 pulled to the +5.2V side. The clear signal release time described above can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC6 and the resistance value of the pull-up resistor PR1. In the present embodiment, a time 35 ms (=1.75 ms×20 times) corresponding to 20 times of the interrupt timer (1.75 ms) of the payout control MPU 4120a is set as the clear signal release time.

The negative logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the RST0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b. The negative logic RESET terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR2. The voltage pulled up to the +5.2 V side is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC7 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC7 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is higher than the threshold value, the negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the payout control I When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the RESETN terminal of the /O port 4120b, the logic becomes LOW and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN of the payout control I/O port 4120b. Input to the terminal.

Further, the negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR2 when the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is switched from ON to OFF within the clear signal release time and the external WDT clear signal is released. As a result, the logic becomes HI and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b, while the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is turned on within the clear signal release time. When the external WDT clear signal is not released as it is, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b.

Since the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b are negative logic inputs, the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is smaller than the threshold value or input to the CK terminal. When the external WDT clear signal is not released while the external WDT clear signal is turned on within the clear signal release time, the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I/O port 4120b are reset. A capacitor PC8 grounded and grounded is electrically connected to the Vs terminal of the external WDT 4120c, and a capacitor PC9 grounded and grounded is electrically connected to the Vcc terminal. The ripple of the +5.2V input to the Vcc terminal is removed by the capacitor PC9 and smoothed. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the external WDT 4120c, is grounded to the grant, and the positive logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3-2. Discharge control crystal oscillator]
The noise component is removed and smoothed by +5.2 V by the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and as shown in FIG. 109, it is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the ground and the capacitor PC10 which is grounded, and the +5.2V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the smoothed +5.2 V is input to the OE terminal which is the output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, in addition to the VCC terminal. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal when +5.2 V is input to its OE terminal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and a clock signal of 8 MHz is supplied. It is input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I/O port 4120b.

[9-3-3. Discharge motor drive circuit]
As shown in FIG. 109, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d is mainly configured by the drive PIC1. The drive PIC1 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, when the emitter terminal is grounded and the payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminal, the drive signal is an excitation signal from the corresponding collector terminal. The drive pulse is output.

+24V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 104 is input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 via the Zener diode PZD0, as shown in FIG. The anode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to +24V, and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1. The +24V input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 serves as the drive power source for the payout motor 744. The base terminal of the drive PIC1 is electrically connected to the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and corresponds to the payout motor drive signal output from the output pins PC0 to PC3. A driving pulse as an excitation signal from the collector terminal is connected to the resistors PR3 to PR6, and each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the payout motor 744 through the prize ball case substrate 754 shown in FIG. Phase). These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation currents flowing in the respective phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the payout motor 744, and rotate the payout motor 744. In addition, when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When the counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive PIC1, the drive PIC1 is damaged, and therefore the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 are electrically connected as protection.

[9-3-4. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120e is a circuit to which detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, the error canceling switch 860a, and the ball removing switch 860b shown in FIG. 99 are input. First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input will be described. Then, a circuit to which a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 is input and a circuit to which a detection signal from the error canceling switch 860a is input. A circuit to which the detection signal from the ball removing switch 860b is input will be described.

[9-3-4(a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the switch is turned on (conduction), and the door frame 5 is connected to the main body frame 3. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 110, +12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 104 is applied to one end of the door frame opening switch 618 through the payout control board 4110, and the other end of the door frame opening switch 618 is It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 via the resistor PR30 and the resistor PR31. A resistor PR32 grounded to the ground and an electrolytic capacitor PC30 grounded to the ground are electrically connected between the resistors PR30 and PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR30 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31 and also to the resistor PR33 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR30 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR34 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR31 via the resistor PR35. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 via the resistor PR36.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR31 is electrically connected to the resistor PR35 and also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR37. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR31 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR38 and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. Of these, it is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR31 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b as a door opening signal.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to the resistor PR36 and also electrically connected to the resistor PR39 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR32 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 98, and the emitter terminal of the transistor PTR32 is open to ground. It is configured as a collector output type. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to +12V by this pull-up resistor. When the transistor PTR32 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR30 and PR32 and the electrolytic capacitor PC30 has a door frame opening switch 618 when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3. This is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to the flapping phenomenon in which the contacts that make up are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR33 and the transistor PTR30 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR35 and PR37 and the transistor PTR31 is Is a final-stage switch circuit that outputs a door opening signal to the payout control I/O port 4120b by turning on/off by an ON/OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit, and includes resistors PR36 and PR39 and a transistor PTR32. The circuit to be performed is a final stage switch circuit that outputs a frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by turning on/off by an ON/OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit.

When the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so +12V supplied through the door frame opening switch 618 is absorbed by the chattering prevention circuit and chattering is absorbed in the first stage. When applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 forming the switch circuit, the transistor PTR30 is turned on and the first stage switch circuit is turned on. When the switch circuit in the first stage is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled down to the ground side, so the voltage applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 forming the switch circuit in the final stage is also moved to the ground side. By being pulled down, the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned off, and the final stage switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR38 and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. Then, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor provided on the main control board 4100, and the frame open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. Becomes

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so +12V is cut off by the door frame opening switch 618, and the base of the transistor PTR30 forming the first stage switch circuit. When the voltage applied to the terminal is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR30 is turned off and the first stage switch circuit is turned off. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off, the voltage is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 and the voltage is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR34. Is applied, the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned on, and the final stage switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled down to the ground side and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32. The frame open information output signal whose logic is set to LOW by lowering the voltage applied to is output to the main control board 4100.

As described above, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the first-stage switch circuit is turned on and the last-stage switch circuit is turned off. The door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100. When the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off when the main body frame 3 is closed, the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off and the switch circuit of the last stage is turned on, and the door frame whose logic is LOW. The opening signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

[9-3-4(b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the switch is turned on (conducting) and the body frame 3 is moved to the outer frame 2. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 110, +12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 104 is applied to one end of the main body frame opening switch 619 via the payout control board 4110, and the other end of the main body frame opening switch 619 is It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 via the resistor PR40 and the resistor PR41. A resistor PR42 grounded to the ground and an electrolytic capacitor PC31 grounded to the ground are electrically connected between the resistors PR40 and PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR33 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41 and also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR43. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR33 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR44 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR34 via the resistor PR45. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 through the resistor PR46.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR34 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45 and also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR47. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR34 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. Of these, it is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR34 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b as a main frame opening signal.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the resistor PR46 and is also electrically connected to the resistor PR49 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR35 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32, and is also electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The transistor PTR35 is an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to the +12V side by this pull-up resistor. When the transistor PTR35 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal. This frame opening information output signal is output not only from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 but also from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32. An OR circuit is configured.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR40 and PR42 and the electrolytic capacitor PC31 has a body frame opening switch 619 when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. This is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to the flapping phenomenon in which the contacts that make up are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR43 and the transistor PTR33 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned on/off by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR47 and the transistor PTR34 is Is a final stage switch circuit that outputs a main frame opening signal to the payout control I/O port 4120b by turning on/off by an ON/OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit, and includes resistors PR46 and PR49 and a transistor PTR35. The configured circuit is a final stage switch circuit that outputs a frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by turning on/off by an ON/OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit.

When the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on. Therefore, +12V supplied via the main body frame opening switch 619 is absorbed by the chattering prevention circuit and chattering is absorbed in the first stage. The transistor PTR33 is turned on by being applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 forming the switch circuit, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned on. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled down to the ground side, so the voltage applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 forming the switch circuit of the final stage is also moved to the ground side. By being pulled down, the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned off, and the final stage switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the main frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. Then, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor provided in the main control board 4100 and the frame opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. Becomes

On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, so +12V is cut off by the main body frame opening switch 619, and the base of the transistor PTR33 forming the first-stage switch circuit. When the voltage applied to the terminal is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR33 turns off and the first-stage switch circuit turns off. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off, the voltage is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 and the voltage is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR44. Therefore, this voltage is the base terminals of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 that form the switch circuit of the final stage. Is applied, the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned on, and the final stage switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled down to the ground side and the main frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35. The frame open information output signal whose logic is set to LOW by lowering the voltage applied to is output to the main control board 4100.

As described above, when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the first-stage switch circuit is turned on and the last-stage switch circuit is turned off. The main frame opening signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100. When the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off in the state of being closed by the outer frame 2, the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off, and the switch circuits of the final stage are both turned on, and the logic of the main frame becomes LOW. The opening signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switches are turned on (conducting). Even if the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is ON (conducting), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. It will be in a state of being. As described above, by adopting the normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, for example, a frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when there is a short circuit. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 4 can determine the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 and the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618′, body frame opening switch 619′). The door frame opening switch 618′ is turned on (conducts) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. .. The body frame opening switch 619' is turned on (conducts) when the body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618' is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3, and the body frame opening switch 619' is disconnected and the switch is turned on. Even when is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 3 remains open from the outer frame 2. As described above, even if the door frame opening switch 618′ and the main body frame opening switch 619′ are normally open switches, for example, a frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when the wire is broken. The main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 can determine whether the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2.

[9-3-4(c). Circuit to which the detection signal from the error release switch is input]
The pin 1 as the output pin of the error release switch 860a is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50 as shown in FIG. 110, and the input port PA of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. Of the input pin PA0. The pin 1 of the error release switch 860a is electrically connected to the pin 2, and the pins 3 and 4 are grounded. Accordingly, when the error canceling switch 860a is not operated, the pin 1 and the pin 2 are pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50, while when the error canceling switch 860a is operated, the pin 1 and the pin 2 are operated. The 2nd and 2nd pins are electrically connected to the 3rd and 4th pins and are pulled down to the ground side.

The error canceling switch 860a is electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC32 that is grounded. It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the error release switch 860a is not operated, the error release detection signal which is pulled up to +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR50 and becomes logic HI is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I/O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the error release switch 860a is operated, the error release detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I/O port 4120b.

[9-3-4(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the ball removal switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 110, the pin 1 as the output pin of the ball removing switch 860b is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, and the input port PA of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. Of the input pin PA1. The pin 1 of the ball removing switch 860b is electrically connected to the pin 2, and the pins 3 and 4 are grounded. As a result, when the ball removal switch 860b is not operated, the pin 1 and the pin 2 are pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, while when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, the pin 1 and pin 2 are pulled up. The 2nd and 2nd pins are electrically connected to the 3rd and 4th pins and are pulled down to the ground side.

The ball-elimination switch 860b is electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the grounded capacitor PC33 (the capacitor PC33 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the ball-shedding switch 860b is not operated, the ball-shedding detection signal which is pulled up to +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51 and has the logic of HI is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I/O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, the ball removal detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I/O port 4120b.

[9-3-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 4120f for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 100 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives, from the CR unit 6, the rental ball request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ via the game ball etc. rental device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and a ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 100 are supplied, while the payout control board 4110 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Through the terminal board 869, an EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And output. As shown in FIG. 111, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC60 to PIC64 (incorporating infrared LEDs and phototransistors).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 via the resistor PR60. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC60. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. At times, the photo coupler PIC60 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is grounded to the ground, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 via the resistor PR61, and the base of the transistor PTR61 is also connected via the resistor PR62. It is electrically connected to the terminal. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the resistor PR61 and also electrically connected to the pull-up resistor R63 pulled up to the +5.2V side.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the resistor PR61 and also to the resistor PR64 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR60 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR65, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. Of these, it is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR60 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor TR61 is electrically connected to the resistor PR62 and also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR66. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR61 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR67 and electrically connected to the firing timing circuit 4130c described later. When the transistor PTR61 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 changes, and the signal is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR61 and PR64 and the transistor PTR60 is a switch circuit, and when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 turns off and pulls up. When the voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60, the transistor PTR60 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b, which is the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW when it is pulled down to the ground side. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled down to the ground side, so that the transistor The PTR 60 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PTR65, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. Is entered.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 is also a switch circuit, and when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 turns off and pulls. When the voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61, the transistor PTR61 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled down to the ground side, and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61 is lowered to the ground side, so that the transistor The PTR 61 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PTR67, and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. The switch circuit constitutes a part of the input circuit of the firing control input circuit 4130a described later.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 via the resistor PR68. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61. The resistor PR68 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC61. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR69, and one of the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I/O port 4120b is preset. It is electrically connected to the defined input pin. When the photocoupler PIC61 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b as a BRDY signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC61 is pulled to the ground side is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 turns off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR69, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 as well as the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 via the resistor PR70. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62. The resistor PR70 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC62. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR71, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I/O port 4120b are preset. It is electrically connected to the defined input pin. The photocoupler PIC62 is turned on/off to change the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC62 is pulled down to the ground side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC62 turns off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR71, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I/O port 4120b. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The EXS signal output from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the payout control I/O port 4120b illustrated in FIG. 109 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR72. +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73. The resistor PR73 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC63. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 through the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned on. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 is It turns off. The emitter terminal of the photo-coupler PIC63 is grounded together with the cathode terminal of the photo-coupler PIC60 to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photo-coupler PIC63 is connected to a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 by a pull-up resistor PR74. Through the CR unit 6, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC63 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 through the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned on. Therefore, EXS in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is pulled down to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 is Since it is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is raised to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR74, and EXS whose logic becomes HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b.

The PRDY signal output from the output pin PB1 of the output port PB of the payout control I/O port 4120b shown in FIG. 109 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR75. +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76. The resistor PR76 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC64. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 is turned on. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 is It turns off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63. Through the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 and electrically connected to the built-in control device thereof. When the photocoupler PIC64 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 is turned on. Therefore, the PRDY in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is lowered to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 through the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 is Since it is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR77 and the logic becomes HI, and thus PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b.

[9-3-6. Various I/O signals of payout control I/O port]
Next, various input/output signals of the payout control I/O port 4120b will be described. The data input/output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control I/O port 4120b exchange various information and various signals with the data input/output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control MPU 4120a via a data bus.

As shown in FIG. 109, the RXD terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b receives the serial data from the main control board 4100 as the main pay serial data reception signal. On the other hand, the serial data to be transmitted from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b to the main control board 4100 is output as a payer serial data transmission signal.

To each input pin of the input port PA of the payout control I/O port 4120b, the error release detection signal from the error release switch 860a is input to the input pin PA0, and the ball removal from the ball removal switch 860b is input to the input pin PA1. The detection signal is input, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 for notifying the normal reception completion of the payment main serial data reception signal is input to the input pin PA2, and the input pin PA3 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. Power failure warning signal 1 is input. Further, to each predetermined input pin of the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I/O port 4120b, a BRQ signal which is a single payout operation start request signal from the CR unit 6 and a ball rental request from the CR unit 6 are issued. BRDY signal which is a signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 such as a CR connection signal 1 for notifying whether or not the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected, a door from the door frame opening switch 618 In addition to the frame opening signal and the body frame opening signal from the body frame opening switch 619, a detection signal from the full tank switch 550 and the like are input.

On the other hand, from each output pin of the output port PB of the payout control I/O port 4120b, the output pin PB0 outputs an EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and the output pin PB1 outputs the EXS signal. , A PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible is output, and the latch state of the D type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is released from the output pin PB2. A power failure clear signal is output, an output pin PB3 outputs a payer ACK signal indicating completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal, and an output pin PB4 outputs an external WDT clear signal to the external WDT4120c. Has been done. A payout motor drive signal is output from the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and an error LED is displayed from each output pin of the output port PD of the payout control I/O port 4120b. The drive signal of the device 860c is output.

[9-4. Circuit of firing control unit]
Next, the firing control unit 4130 will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, the firing control unit 4130 includes a firing control input circuit 4130a, an oscillation circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e. Here, the firing control input circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 112, and the detailed description of the configuration of the firing timing circuit 4130c and the like will be described later.

[9-4-1. Fire control input circuit]
As shown in FIG. 112, in the firing control input circuit 4130a of the payout control board 4110, the detection signal from the touch switch 516 of the handle device 500 and the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 of the handle device 500 are relayed by the handle. It is input through the board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The touch switch 516 detects whether or not the palm or finger is in contact with the front 506 of the rotating handle body of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 47, and the firing stop switch 518 is a single-shot button of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. By operating 520, it is detected whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the intention of the player. First, a circuit to which the detection signal from the touch switch 516 is input will be described, and subsequently, a circuit to which the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 is input will be described.

[9-4-1a. Circuit to which the detection signal from the touch switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 112, +12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 104 is applied to one end of the touch switch 516 through the resistance PR80 of the payout control board 4110, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the handle relay board 192. The other end of the touch switch 516 is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, input to the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the payout control board 4110, and the resistor PR81 is turned on. Through, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80. The base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is electrically connected to the resistor PR81, and is also electrically connected to the resistor PR82 grounded to the ground and the capacitor PC80 grounded to the ground. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor C80. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR80 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR83 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. When the transistor PTR80 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c as a touch detection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR81 and PR82 and the transistor PTR80 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from the touch switch 516. When the palm or finger is not touching the front of the rotating handle body 506, the handle relay substrate The voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor provided at 192 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80, so that the transistor PTR80 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled down to the ground side, and the touch detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the palm or finger touches the front 506 of the rotary handle body, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR80 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the touch detection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

[9-4-1b. Circuit to which the detection signal from the firing stop switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 112, one end of the firing stop switch 518 receives +12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 104 via the resistance PR84 of the payout control board 4110, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the handle relay board 192. The other end of the firing stop switch 518 that is being applied is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the payout control board 4110, and the resistance is applied. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 via PR85. The base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is electrically connected to the resistor PR85, and is also electrically connected to the resistor PR86 grounded to the ground and the capacitor PC81 grounded to the ground. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is smoothed with noise removed by the capacitor C81. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR81 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR87 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. When the transistor PTR81 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR85 and PR86 and the transistor PTR81 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, and is provided on the handle relay board 192 when the one-shot button 520 is not operated. The voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81, so that the transistor PTR81 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled down to the ground side, and the firing stop detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the one-shot button 520 is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is lowered to the ground side, the transistor PTR81 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR87 and the firing stop detection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

The switch circuit composed of the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 shown in FIG. 111 is also a part of the input circuit of the firing control input circuit 4130a, and the CR connection signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61. Is also input to the firing timing circuit 4130c in addition to the touch detection signal and the firing stop signal described above.

[9-5. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 113.

[9-5-1. Various input/output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113( a ), the payout control board 4110 sends a payer serial data transmission signal, a payer ACK signal, a power failure notice signal, frame opening information output information, etc. to the main control board 4100. Output. On the other hand, the payout control board 4110, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, the main pay ACK signal, the RAM clear signal, a big hit information output signal such as a 15 round big hit information output signal and a 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation. Game information signals related to games such as middle information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. are inputted from the main control board 4100.

[9-5-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113(b), in addition to the door frame opening signal and the main body frame opening signal, a prize ball indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 71. Number information output signal, from the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, in addition to jackpot information output signals such as 15 round jackpot information output signal and 2 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special The game information signals such as the symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the starting opening winning information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784.

The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer (not shown) installed in a game hall (hall) and monitors a game played by the player. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of jackpots in which the number of rounds is two (2 round jackpot). The number of jackpots of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots) and the number of jackpots in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot and the number of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots. Therefore, the number of jackpots actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is impossible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and some players may decide whether or not to play a game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some choose. However, the number of occurrences of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter may be biased to the number of occurrences of the two rounds of big hits, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of big hits occur. In some cases, a 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. As described above, although the number of times of occurrence of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, it may arouse the player more than necessary. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 15-round big hit information output signal and the 2-round big hit information output signal are separately output to the hall computer as the big hit information output signal, so that the hall computer generates the number of occurrences of the 2-round big hit. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of 15 rounds of big hits. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the two-round big hit or the 15-round big hit. The number of round jackpots and the number of round 2 jackpots can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round jackpots can be displayed as the number of jackpot game states, so that the player's aspirations are increased more than necessary. Nor.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period until the 2-round big hit occurs and is ended, and the 15-round big hit information output signal is also the 15-round big hit. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when the 2-round jackpot is generated, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. When the 15 round big hit information is output to the hall computer, the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer only for a predetermined period. Such a 2 round big hit information output signal and 15 round big hit information A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[10. Driving method of firing solenoid]
Next, a driving method of the firing solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 64 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117. 114 is a block diagram showing a drive circuit of the firing solenoid, FIG. 115 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 116 is a diagram showing characteristics of a DC/DC converter. 117 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 114. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input/output current, the output voltage, the logic and waveform of the signal, etc. at a predetermined point of the drive circuit will be described.

[10-1. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 114, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 mainly includes a firing control input circuit 4130a of the firing control unit 4130 of the payout control board 4110, a transmission circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball. The transmission solenoid drive circuit 4130e, the DC/DC converter 831a of the firing power supply board 831, the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the power factor correction circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and the smoothing circuit 851c.

As described above, when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the launch control input circuit 4130a causes the CR unit 6 to move from the pachinko gaming machine 1. A touch switch 516 that receives a signal indicating that power (AC24V) is being received and outputs it as a CR connection signal to the firing timing circuit 4130c to detect whether or not the palm or finger touches the front 506 of the rotating handle body. When the detection signal from is input, it is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a touch detection signal, and is detected from the firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball according to the intention of the player. When the signal is input, the signal is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

The launch timing circuit 4130c permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal from the launch control input circuit 4130a. Specifically, since the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the launch timing circuit 4130c is not input with the CR connection signal. In the first case, the touch detection signal tells the front 506 of the rotating handle that the palm or the finger is not touching, and the firing stop detection signal forcibly stops the launch of the game ball. In the third case of transmitting, when at least one of the cases applies, the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited from launching the game ball, while when not applicable to all, the launch solenoid 654 is allowed to launch the game ball.

The clock signal from the transmission circuit 4130b is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c, and when the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted, 100 game balls per minute are generated based on this clock signal. The emission reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward the game area 1100 and output to the emission solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and the emission reference pulse is multiplied by a predetermined number (five times in the present embodiment) to send the ball reference pulse. Is generated and output to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 with a merged current obtained by merging the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 with +24V from the power supply board 851.

The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4130da, an amplifier circuit 4130db, a voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, and a switching circuit 4130dd. The shunt regulator circuit 4130da is supplied with +5.2V created by the +5.2V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851, and stabilized +2.5V (DC+2.5V, hereinafter, " +2.5V”) is created and supplied to the amplifier circuit 4130db.

As shown in FIG. 115A, the shunt regulator circuit 4130da mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90. The shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can generate and supply a stabilized power supply that is held at a constant voltage with respect to a load. To the REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, +5.2V is applied via the resistor PR90, and is input to the REF terminal by this resistor PR90. The current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5V to the amplifier circuit 4130db. This +2.5V is smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC90 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC90 also serves as a low-pass filter). The terminal A, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Returning to FIG. 114, the amplifier circuit 4130db amplifies +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da by a factor of 2 to generate direct current +5.0V (DC+5.0V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.0V”). It is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay substrate 192.

The amplifier circuit 4130db is mainly composed of an operational amplifier PIC91 as shown in FIG. 115(a). The operational amplifier PIC91 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and +2.5 V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 of the shunt regulator circuit 4130da is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91, so that the operational amplifier PIC91. Of the resistor PR92 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 and whose other end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR91 whose one end is electrically grounded. Is electrically connected to. The resistance values of the resistors PR91 and PR92 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC91 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is, as described above, +5.0V obtained by amplifying the +2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91 by two times, and the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle It is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 via the relay board 192. This +5.0V is smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC91 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC91 also serves as a low-pass filter). The +24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC92 which is grounded.

Returning to FIG. 114, the potentiometer 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, which includes a first fixed terminal, a second fixed terminal, and a variable terminal, and the first fixed terminal is +5.0V from the above-described amplifier circuit 4130db. And the second fixed terminal is electrically connected to the resistor PR100 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR100 is grounded to the ground. When the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotationally operated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 also rotates and the voltage applied to the first fixed terminal and the second fixed terminal is applied to the rotary handle main body front 506. The voltage is divided according to the rotating operation of the potentiometer 512, that is, according to the rotational position of the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512, and the divided voltage can be taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512. The voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is passed through the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880, and the resistances PR93 and PR94 described later in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110 (FIG. 115(b)). The voltage divided by the resistance PR94 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the emission intensity target voltage.

As described above, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 is grounded via the handle relay substrate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 as shown in FIG. 115(b). The ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC93 (the capacitor PC93 also serves as a low-pass filter), and the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110 is operated. It is applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower. As shown in FIG. 115(b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage in the order of volts and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first stage operational amplifier PIC92 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first stage operational amplifier PIC92. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 at the first stage multiplies the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 by one, that is, outputs the voltage as it is in the volt order. Although the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 simply outputs the input voltage that is a voltage of the volt order as it is, it outputs the voltage to the first-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the second-stage operational amplifier PIC93. The circuit is separated from the first-stage output side circuit. As a result, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the initial stage input side circuit to the initial stage output side circuit, and the influence of the initial stage output side circuit can be prevented from affecting the initial stage input side circuit. The +24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC94 which is grounded.

The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR93 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (− terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR93 is a non-inverting input terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage ( (+ terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR93 and the other end of the resistor PR94 whose one end is grounded. As a result, as described above, the voltage from the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage is the voltage of the volt order because it is simply outputting the input voltage which is the voltage of the volt order, and is divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94. The voltage which is divided by the divided resistance PR94 and applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage is applied as a voltage on the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage multiplies the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 by one, that is, the millivolt order as it is is output to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the emission intensity target voltage. To do. Although the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage that is divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94 and is taken by the resistor PR94 of the millivolt order, as it is, the millivolt order resistance divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94. Circuit isolation is realized between the rear-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage that the PR94 is responsible for and the rear-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. As a result, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear-stage input side circuit to the rear-stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear-stage output side circuit can be eliminated from the rear-stage input side circuit. The +24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC95 grounded.

Returning to FIG. 114, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 flows through the resistor PR101 having one end grounded, so that the voltage of millivolt order that the resistor PR101 takes charge of is the voltage control circuit as the firing control voltage. Applied to 4130 dc. The firing intensity target voltage, which is the above-mentioned millivolt order voltage, is also applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. As described above, the firing control voltage and the firing strength target voltage compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc are, as described above, changed from the voltage of the order of millivolts to the voltage of the order of millivolts in the payout control board 4110 (the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d). The voltages are respectively reduced by the voltages assigned to PR101 and PR94. That is, since the wiring pattern is applied via the wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, the wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc has a firing control voltage and a firing strength target voltage at a voltage of the order of millivolts. In contrast to the above, it is possible to compare between the payout control board 4110 and the hitting ball launching device 650, and between the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500 via wiring (harness). Since the wiring (harness) is easily affected by noise, the influence of noise between the substrate devices is suppressed by setting the voltage in the volt order.

The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is an inverting type circuit that compares the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage with each other, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4130dd. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is a logical output of HI or LOW. When the firing control voltage is larger than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter, referred to as “L”), while the firing control voltage. Is smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter referred to as "H"). In this way, since the output logic becomes H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4130dd as an ON/OFF signal.

The switching circuit 4130dd has a current from the DC/DC converter 831a provided in the emission power supply substrate 831 according to the ON/OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc each time the emission reference pulse from the emission timing circuit 4130c is input, The merged current obtained by merging the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is input, the switching circuit 4130dd produces a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. While flowing to the firing solenoid 654, when the OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is input, the current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. That is, the switching circuit 4130dd receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, and merges the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. When the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is flowing, the voltage divided by the resistor PR101 becomes the firing control voltage and becomes larger than the firing strength target voltage, and the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes L and the current is turned off. The signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, and the switching circuit 4130dd cuts off the constant current flowing in the firing solenoid 654. Due to this interruption, the current does not flow to the firing solenoid 654, the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes H again, and the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, and the switching circuit 4130dd is output. As described above, 4130dd supplies the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. As described above, the switching circuit 4130dd generates the merged current obtained by merging the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 according to the ON/OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. The switching circuit 4130dd controls self-oscillation of the ON/OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc to cause the current to flow to the firing solenoid in order to allow the current to flow or to shut off the constant current. That is, the switching circuit 4130dd functions as a “self-excited oscillation constant current circuit” and brings the firing control voltage close to the firing strength target voltage. As a result, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotationally operated, and the launch solenoid 654 can be driven with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

When the player is in the original rotation position where the player touches the front 506 of the rotary handle main body and does not rotate the front 506 of the rotary handle main body, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is the second fixed value of the potentiometer 512. The voltage is applied to the resistor PR100 applied to the terminal. That is, the second fixed terminal of the potentiometer 512 is in a state in which the voltage that the resistor PR100 handles is applied as an offset voltage. This offset voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the emission intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, the switching circuit 4130dd combines the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The combined current is applied to the firing solenoid 654. The current output from this DC/DC converter 831a becomes the minimum output current. At this time, the firing strength of the firing solenoid 654 is such that it at least jumps over the firing rail 660 shown in FIG. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is the emission intensity target voltage, the current corresponding to the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined. When the combined current is generated by the launch solenoid 654, the game ball shot by the launch solenoid 654 can jump over the launch rail 660, but along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. Since it cannot reach the game area 1100, it will be received and collected at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 as a foul ball. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows to the firing solenoid 654, all the game balls that have been hit are collected as foul balls. As a result, it is possible to prevent overlapping with the game ball sent to the launch rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585, and thus it is possible to prevent the launch solenoid 654 from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. In addition to being able to prevent the load from being applied to the firing solenoid 654, a failure can be prevented.

Further, as described above, the offset voltage is set to a voltage for obtaining the minimum firing intensity commensurate with the original rotation position when the rotation position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is the original rotation position. The game ball shot along the launch rail 660 and the outer rail 1111 by the hit ball launching device 650 is received at the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 as a foul ball, and all are collected. It has become so. As a result, at the time when the player starts the rotating operation of the front of the rotating handle body 506, all the game balls can be played even if the player cannot rotate the front of the rotating handle body 506 to increase the firing strength. Since it is possible to jump over the launch rail 660, it is possible to prevent the game balls from colliding with each other on the launch rail 660. Therefore, before the next game ball is launched by the firing solenoid 654, the player rotates the rotating handle body front 506 to increase the launch strength, so that the game ball launched this time at the launch strength is outer railed. By colliding with the previously launched game ball that descends along 1111, the previously launched game ball and the currently launched game ball can be made to jump to the game area 1100, and temporarily, in the game area 1100. Even if the ball cannot be made to pop out, it is received at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, which is located at the lower part of the foul space 626 as a foul ball, and all is collected. In other words, even when the player cannot rotate the front of the rotating handle body 506 to increase the launch strength, the launch strength is sufficient to jump over the launch rail 660, and thus the launched game ball. Do not collide with each other on the launch rail 660 to cause ball clogging. Also, when the player rotates the front of the rotating handle main body 506 to increase the launch strength, the game ball launched this time with the launch strength is changed to the previously launched game ball that descends along the outer rail 1111. Even if it is not possible to cause the game ball that was hit this time together with the game ball that was hit last time to hit the game area 1100 by colliding, the foul ball of the foul cover unit 540 that is located under the foul space 626 as a foul ball. Since all are received and collected at the entrance 542e, the player can rotate the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to further increase the firing strength, and thereby the game ball can be ejected to the game area 1100 without causing a ball clogging. .. In other words, the game ball hit this time is made to collide with the game ball hit last time that descends along the outer and inner rails 1111 and the game ball hit this time is jumped to the game area 1100 together with the game ball hit last time. Even if the player feels uncomfortable because it cannot be played, the player rotates the rotating handle main body 506 to further increase the firing strength, so that the player can play the game ball without clogging the ball. Since it can be made to jump to the area 1100, the discomfort can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the player's discomfort due to a ball clogging at the start of the rotating operation of the front of the rotating handle body 506.

In the present embodiment, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 for the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, the firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is +2.5V which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da. The +5.0V amplified by the amplifier circuit 4130db is divided by the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and the divided voltage is also maintained at the same rotation position as the rotation handle front 506. If it is, the voltage is held at a constant voltage without any fluctuation. As a result, the switching circuit 4130dd causes the firing control voltage to approach the firing strength target voltage by causing a combined current to flow through the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650, and when the firing control voltage becomes the same as the firing strength target voltage, the rotation occurs. When the rotation position of the handle body front 506 is held at the same rotation position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change and a constant current flows, so the firing solenoid 654 moves the game ball to the game area 1100. The launch intensity to be fired toward is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the "flying unevenness" of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

In addition, the pachinko island facility in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed has a gaming ball circulation system in which the gaming balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are polished and supplied again to the pachinko gaming machine. For this reason, the temperature inside the pachinko island facility is extremely high due to the heat generated by the polishing of the game balls, the heat generated by the collision and friction between the game balls, and the heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko gaming machine and various types of illumination. .. In the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 for the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, +2.5V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is accumulated in the pachinko machine. It is possible to output. This suppresses the fluctuation of +2.5V due to the temperature, thereby suppressing the “fluctuation” of the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512, that is, the “fluctuation” of the emission intensity target voltage. The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc can output the control signal to the switching circuit 4130dd without including the above. That is, when the rotation position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is the same rotation position, it is possible to suppress "unevenness" in the firing strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100, so that "flying unevenness" of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[10-2. Input/output current and output voltage of DC/DC converter]
Next, with respect to the input/output current and output voltage of the DC/DC converter 831a, the input current at the TA point and the output current and output voltage at the TB point shown in FIG. 114 will be described with reference to FIG. Point TA is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC/DC converter 831a, and point TB is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is the potential difference from the ground.

First, the relationship between the output voltage Vout and the output current Iout at the point TB is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from +35V, as shown in FIG. 116(a). Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is +35V to +30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is +30V to +20V, the output voltage Vout decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section C in which the current Iout increases by about 40 mA from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout increases from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases about 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA and the output voltage Vout increases by +10 V as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from to +5 V, the output current Iout increases by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. The output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA in the vicinity of +5 V to zero V.

As shown in FIG. 116(b), the relationship between the input current Iin at the TA point and the output current Iout at the TB point is such that as the output voltage Vout decreases from +35V, the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases. Have a relationship. Specifically, in the section A in which the output voltage Vout is from +35 V to +30 V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced by about 80 mA from 400 mA to 320 mA. In this section A, a current corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 flows to the firing solenoid 654, and when the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball hit toward the game area 1100 is still a game. When the firing intensity is difficult to reach the region 1100, a current corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin becomes smaller than the output current Iout. The game ball shot toward the area 1100 has a launch strength reaching the game area 1100. In the section B where the output voltage Vout is from +30V to +20V, the output current Iout is increased by about 40mA from 360mA to 400mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced by about 60mA from 320mA to 260mA, which is compared with the output current Iout. And the input current Iin is completely small. In the section C in which the output voltage Vout is from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout is increased by about 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, while the input current Iin is decreased by about 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA, as in the section B. , The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In the section D in which the output voltage Vout is from +10V to +5V, the output current Iout is increased by about 350mA from 660mA to 1010mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced by about 35mA from 210mA to 175mA, and the section B and the section are shown. Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

When the value of the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the merged current obtained by merging this 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotating handle body. The current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotary handle main body front 506 is in the original rotation position where the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated, whereas the value of the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. At some time, the combined current obtained by merging the 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the front of the rotary handle body 506 and rotates the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise. Then, it is the electric current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when it is at the limit rotational position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the launch strength of the launch solenoid 654 is such that the game ball that has already jumped out to the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the hitting portion 1114. Then, it rolls toward the downstream along the inner rail 1113, and is strong enough to be collected at the outlet 1151 without entering the various winning openings. Therefore, as a range in which the value of the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a when the player is rotating the front of the rotary handle main body 506 in the clockwise direction to play the game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA<value of output current Iout<1000 mA), the current is on the order of milliamperes.

[10-3. Relationship between input/output current and output voltage of DC/DC converter and emission reference pulse from emission timing circuit]
Next, at a constant rotational position in front of the rotary handle main body 506, the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 114, and the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c, This will be described with reference to FIG. 117. As described above, the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC/DC converter 831a, and the TC point is the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4130c. This is a point for referencing T0.

As described above, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c allows 100 gaming balls toward the gaming area 1100 per minute, that is, per 60,000 ms when the launching of the gaming balls by the firing solenoid 654 is permitted. Since it is set to be ejected, its pulse width is 30 ms and its period T is 600 ms, as shown in FIG. 117(a).

Here, DC/DC when the player touches the front 506 of the rotating handle body and rotates the front 506 of the rotating handle body to the limit rotation position and when the player is in the original rotation position where the player does not rotate. The waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

When the front of the rotary handle body 506 is at the limit rotational position, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, as shown in FIGS. 117(b) and 117(c). As described above, the merged current obtained by merging the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described maximum current and starts to flow to the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing in the firing solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC/DC converter 831a (voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) decreases to +5V according to the characteristics of the DC/DC converter 831a shown in FIG. 117, and the DC/DC converter The value of the output current Iout of 831a becomes 1010 mA which is the maximum output current described above. Then, after 30 ms have elapsed after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the input is stopped, the discharge is advanced until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). By cutting off the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a gradually recovers to +35V. Along with this, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC/DC converter 831a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116, the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Iout increases while the output voltage Vout decreases. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is near zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a. When charging is started with a certain current of 1010 mA and the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a is recovered to around +35 V, charging is continued with a current of 360 mA and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed by the time the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, the charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the input of the present emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 after 30 ms has elapsed.

On the other hand, when the rotation handle body front 506 is in the original rotation position, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, FIG. 117(b), As shown in (d), the merged current obtained by merging the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-mentioned minimum current, and is emitted to the firing solenoid 654. The flow starts (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing to the firing solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC/DC converter 831a (voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) slightly decreases according to the characteristics of the DC/DC converter 831a shown in FIG. 117, but shown in FIG. Belonging to the section A, the value of the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a becomes 360 mA which is the minimum output current described above. Then, when the input of the emission reference pulse T0 is stopped 30 ms after the input, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). By cutting off the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a gradually recovers to +35V. Along with this, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC/DC converter 831a. Specifically, as described above, the output current Iout of the DC/DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Iout increases while the output voltage Vout decreases. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC/DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 falls slightly, but belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 outputs the output of the DC/DC converter 831a. The charging is started by the current Iout of 360 mA, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed by the time the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, the charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the input of the present emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 after 30 ms has elapsed.

As described above, even if the maximum current and the minimum current flow in the firing solenoid 654, the electric charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within 30 ms of the discharge reference pulse T0 of this time is input due to the characteristics of the DC/DC converter 831a. Can be completed within the remaining charging time of 570 ms until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

Here, consider a case where the DC/DC converter 831a independently adopts a control method of supplying a current to the firing solenoid 654 in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within 30 ms after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. In view of this, in this control method, the DC/DC converter 831a independently supplies a current of about 2 A to 3.5 A to the firing solenoid 654, and therefore this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When driving the firing solenoid 654, a large electric current larger than 2 A to 3.5 A instantaneously flows. Then, each time the emission reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated in the cycle T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases in each cycle T. In other words, the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to the electronic components, the electric decoration used for decoration, etc. in addition to the instantaneous large current flowing when the firing solenoid 654 is driven. When the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply is cut off for safety. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case where the DC/DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the input of the firing reference pulse T0. An amperes-order current supplied from the +37V DC power source of the power supply board 851 to the DC/DC converter 831a is extended to a period of 600 ms from when the emission reference pulse T0 is input until the next emission reference pulse T0 is input. , The first current of the milliamperes order supplied to the DC/DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37V of the power supply substrate 851 when the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And a second current of milliamperes order supplied to the DC/DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37V of the power supply substrate 851 when the electrolytic capacitor SC0 charges the power from the DC/DC converter 831a. can do. As a result, in the ampere order supplied from the DC power supply of +37V of the power supply substrate 851 to the DC/DC converter 831a in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the input of the emission reference pulse T0 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The electric current is supplied from the DC power supply of +37V of the power supply substrate 851 to the DC/DC converter 831a during a period of 600 ms from when the emission reference pulse T0 is input in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 until the next emission reference pulse T0 is input. It can be averaged by the supplied “first current” and “second current” of the milliamperes order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the power supply board 851 from receiving a load for supplying a momentary large current due to the driving of the firing solenoid 654. Further, it is possible to eliminate the time-consuming design of operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[10-4. Relation between launch reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball sending reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 and the ball sending reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4130c will be described with reference to FIG. 117. As described above, the TC point is a point for referencing the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 114 is referred to the ball sending reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4130c. This is the point to do.

The ball sending reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (=T0 (30 ms)×5) which is five times the 30 ms that is the firing reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, as shown in FIGS. 117A and 117E, the ball feeding reference pulse T1 drives the ball feeding solenoid drive of the firing solenoid driving circuit 4130d. It is input to the circuit 4130e (timing t0, when 150 ms elapses, the input is stopped (timing t3). As a result, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to perform ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. As a result, the set of the next game ball to be launched can be completed by the time the next launch reference pulse T0 is input, and each time the launch reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is played in the game area 1100. You can continuously launch towards.

[11. Commands related to transmission/reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. 118 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 119 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 119 is a table showing various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 119, and FIG. 121 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout, transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described, and the main control Various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the board 4100 will be described.

[11-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. When input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 to drive the payout motor 744 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to store the upper plate 301, When the lower plate 302 is electrically connected to a device for paying out game balls as a rental ball (such a pachinko game machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 118(a). In the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared, and one prize ball is provided in the command 10H. The command 11H specifies two prize balls, and the command 1EH specifies 15 prize balls. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out the game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, which are storage plates, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 118(b), the payout is performed from the main control board 4100. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to the control board 4110. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,..., Command In 2EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 118(c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the command 30H specifies the self-check. By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether the ACK signal is input, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as the confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[11-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the various commands include special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure tuning effect related, ordinary electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

[11-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 98, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 119, the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the upper special symbol display device 1185, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start, the special symbol 1 designation, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect end, and the command of the state designation at the time of fluctuation is configured. To these various commands, “A*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 1 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the special figure entrainment effect start in the effect pattern designated by the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is for designating off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 entrainment effect end command is an instruction to end the special figure 1 entrainment effect, and the fluctuation state designation command is an instruction to specify the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[11-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization performance related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 98, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. 119, the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Regarding the lower special symbol display device 1186, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, "B*H" is assigned as the status, and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 2 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the special figure entrainment effect start in the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for deviating, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The special figure 2 entrainment effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 entrainment effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 fluctuation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 119, in the category of big hit related, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N times display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The big hit opening command is for instructing to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (shown in FIG. 96 of the attacker unit 2100). It is for instructing the opening or opening of the Nth round of the special winning opening 2103, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the closing of the special winning opening 1 (the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). 2103, which indicates that the game is being closed or is being closed, and that the special winning opening 1 count display command has detected 0 to 10 counts (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 98, The number of gaming balls that entered the special winning opening 2103) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command is for instructing to start the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is for instructing the jackpot symbol information display. is there.

The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during the small hit, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is open or open). The small hit count display command is for a small hit medium big winning opening winning effect (during a small hit, when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110). The small hitting ending command is a command to start the small hitting ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (the big hit of the attacker unit 2100). When the winning opening 2103 is opened), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is closed), and the big winning is given. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the special winning opening 1 is changed (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and the game ball entering the special winning opening 2103 is a count switch). 2110), the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is sent when the special winning opening is opened (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). It

The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened during the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium-large winning opening (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), and the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 119, the category of turning on the power is composed of various commands having the name of turning on the power. This power-on command is assigned with "D*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The power-on command is to instruct the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 98 is operated. ).

As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at times other than RAM clear at the time of power-on of the main control board and RAM clear. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when power is restored from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, a main control side power-on process described below is executed. A power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 98, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. 119, the normal pattern display of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the device 1189, it is composed of commands named general figure synchronization effect start, general figure designation, general figure synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state designation. These various commands are assigned status "E*H" and mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The general figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the general figure synchronization effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the universal pattern specification command is for specifying a falling edge, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of starting the normal symbol 1 variation, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is , Ordinary symbol variation time elapses (ordinary symbol confirmation time) is transmitted, and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning/losing information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-6. Normal electric power director related]
The normal electric part effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 96 which is opened/closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 98, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. It consists of a command called "Opening per figure", "Opening the universal communication", and "Ending per figure". These various commands are assigned status "F*H" and mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The universal figure opening command is for instructing to start the universal figure opening, and the universal battery open display command is for starting the universal battery open (a pair of movable pieces 2106 is opened in the left-right direction by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105). State or when expanding), and the ending command per universal figure is an instruction to start ending per universal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the per-university-universal opening command is transmitted at the start of per-universal-university opening, and the general-universal-open display command is issued when the general-universal-open (when the pair of movable pieces 2106 is driven by the starter solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 120, the notification display category is made up of commands named winning prize display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. A status of “6*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The prize abnormality display command is for a game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the special winning opening is won except during the big hit (condition device is operating). When the count switch 2110 detects), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it is for instructing to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. Is for instructing to start the disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display when a disconnection/short-circuit of the electrical connection of the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 98 occurs. In this case, the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification is instructed.

Further, the door opening command is issued by the main body frame 3 based on the detection signals (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 which are input through the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 or the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the door open notification is instructed. Based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When it is in the state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, a prize abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of sending a command to the , Which is sent when a wire break or short circuit occurs, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality is detected in the magnetic detection switch 3024, and the door opening command is issued when a door opening is detected (door frame opening). Based on the detection signals from the switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, when the body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 5 is open to the body frame 3. When there is a door closing command, the door closing command is transmitted (based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2). And the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 120, the status display section is composed of commands having the names of frame status 1, error release navigation, and frame status 2. A status of “7*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 120, “7*H” is set. The status is set and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds the additional information “7*H” to these received commands. Is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The shaped frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and when the error is cleared, and the error clear navigation command is sent when the error is cleared and the frame status 2 command is created when the power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 120, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the sound source IC 4150c of the peripheral control section 4150, the liquid crystal control section 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and Various boards such as the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 are inspected).

As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on and is transmitted at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control side power-on process described below is executed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-10. Other]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 120, starting mouth winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 storage, special symbol 2 storage, normal symbol storage, special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect. A status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The start mouth winning command is for instructing the start of the start winning effect, and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, and Based on the detection signal from the start opening switch 2109, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the lower start opening 2102 is respectively instructed, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designating command changes from the fluctuation shortening operation state. It is for instructing the state transition to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, the high probability end designation command is for instructing the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is the special symbol. 1 hold 0 to 4 (the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 when the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 96 ( Hold number)), the special symbol 2 storage command, special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 96 and the lower special of the function display board 1191) The symbol display 1186 conveys the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol (the number of reserves), and the normal symbol memory command is 0-4 regular symbols 1 reserve (gate shown in FIG. 96. The game sphere passes through the section 2350 and the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls that have not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol (reserved number), and special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect Before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191, the command is read ahead and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on the special symbol 1 hold. It is for instructing the pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the result, and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is used for the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display 1186 below the special symbol 2 hold function display board 1191. Before starting, pre-reading is instructed to start a pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display device 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is a starting mouth winning command (when a game ball enters the upper starting mouth 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting mouth switch 3022, or a lower starting mouth switch). When the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the 2109), the side speakers 130, 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left shown in FIG. The main speaker 262 and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. 79 are mainly transmitted by voice to notify that fact, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been exhausted. The high-probability end designation command is transmitted at the time (after the outage stop period elapses), and the high-probability end designation command is issued at the end of the stop period (after the outage stop period elapses) after the fluctuation has been determined by using the high-probability number in the case of “high probability N times” When the special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted, when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls changes (the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191). In the state where there is a reserved number that has not been used yet, when the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the reserved number increases, and from the reserved number to the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185. When the number of holdings is reduced to be used, the special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the function display board 1191 is below). In the state where there is a pending number that is not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 1186, when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the pending number increases, or from the pending number. The special symbol display 1186 is used for the variable display of the special symbol and when the number of holdings thereof is reduced), is transmitted, and the normal symbol memory command is a normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number change (the game part 2350 is a gaming ball). In the state where there is a holding number that has not yet been used in the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the normal symbol display on the function display substrate 1191, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 and the holding number increases or , When the number of holdings is reduced by using the normal symbol display 1189 for variable display of ordinary symbols from the number of holdings), the special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command is when the number of special symbols 1 operation holding balls increases. (When the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the number of holdings increases) is transmitted, the special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command, the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number increase It is transmitted at the time of addition (when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the number of holdings increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is, when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or from the lower starting opening switch 2109. (When the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal of), the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821 mainly notify that by voice. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 101 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821 are used to notify by voice and also used to monitor the presence or absence of cheating. It is designed to do. On the other hand, in other pachinko game machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and sounds from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262 and the lower speaker 821. Some specifications do not notify.

[11-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 121, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 4110 is made up of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

The frame status 1 command provides a ball out, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more pieces, a connection abnormality, and a CR unconnection. When the ball is out, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit). Value 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to value 1 when full, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1 in 50 or more stocks, and bit 3 (B3) is set when connection is abnormal. 1 is set, and bit 4 (B4) is set to the value 1 when CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

The error clear navigation command has a ball gaze, a counting switch error, and a retry error. For a ball gaze, the value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and in the counting switch error, the value is set in bit 3 (B3). 1 is set, and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the "count switch error" indicates whether or not the malfunction of the count switch 751 shown in FIG. 99 has occurred. The "retry error" indicates that the payout of unsatisfactory game balls is repeatedly performed by the retry operation. The bit (B0), the bit (B1), and the bit 5 (B5) to the bit 7 (B7) of the error canceling navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, and a value 1 for B6. The value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared for the ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball removal. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S360 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[12. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 98 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing, and FIG. 124 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. 153 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the initial value updating type counter (range close to the maximum value side), and FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the initial value updating type counter (minimum). It is the range closer to the value side). First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and subsequently, the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be described.

[12-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit game state, and a big hit determination initial value determination used to determine the initial value of this big hit determination random number For random number, reach determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated, and the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol shown in FIG. 98. Random display pattern random numbers for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 1186, and the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 when the jackpot gaming state is generated. Random numbers for big hit symbols to be used for determination of big hit symbols to be derived and displayed, random numbers for determining initial value for big hit symbols to be used for determining initial values of this big hit symbol, when generating a small hit game state Random hit for the small hit symbol used to determine the small hit symbol that is derived and displayed on the upper special symbol indicator 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186, the small hit to be used for determining the initial value of this small hit symbol random number Random numbers for design initial value determination, etc. are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol to be used for determining whether to open/close the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. 96, and an initial value for the random number for determining a normal symbol are determined. Ordinary symbol per determination for use initial value determination random numbers, and normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers for use in determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 shown in FIG. Is prepared.

For example, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range (from the minimum value to the maximum value 32 to the maximum value 32767 in the present embodiment). The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and subsequently counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an “initial value updating type counter”. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of lottery one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the big hit determination random number. Further, the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination is also the same as the above-described update method for the big hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, when the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination value is determined as described above. The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 98 is operated when the power is turned on or when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. In FIG. 98, the checksum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the game information stored in the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) stored at the time of (power off) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is The main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 98 takes out an ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number based on the taken ID code. The initial value derivation process is performed and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is always updated by overwriting the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is derived using the ID code, and the ID is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the whole area of the main control internal RAM, the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the code is stored. The second security measure for deriving the same fixed value as described above and the two-step security measure for prevent the analysis.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method, disassembles it, and uses an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value that are illegally acquired coincide with each other, the ID code is assigned a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a′ provided in the other game board 4′. That is, in the other game board 4', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value match is completely different from that of the game board 4 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in the other game board 4′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1′, and is disassembled and analyzed. Even if the aim is to generate a start-up prize at every predetermined interval, and to make a game ball enter the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 shown in FIG. 96 at each predetermined interval, a big hit. The game state cannot be generated.

[12-2. Initial value update type counter operation]
As shown in FIG. 153, the initial value update type counter fetches an ID code from the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a when clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM (when RAM is cleared), and An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number based on the extracted ID code is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value to the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value in the first cycle. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number as the jackpot determination initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is performed and the value obtained in this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained in the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value in the lottery. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter As the third cycle, the value obtained from the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, as the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability, and the value is read from the normal time judgment table, while the value 31768 to the value in the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation time determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination updates the predetermined fixed numerical value range from the value 0 as the minimum value to the value 32767 as the maximum value. In other words, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is a range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both low probability and high probability. It is set.

Here, as a range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), a value 10 to a value 209 is set in the low probability and a value 10 to a value 339 is set in the high probability. As shown in, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both low probability and high probability. Will be set to. In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and the value 10 Comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) of, the former period has a much lower probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (the value 209 for low probability and the value 339 for high probability) in the range of large hit determination values (big hit determination range). And the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter one. The probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the game ball is started up by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating a radio wave toward the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. When the cheating acts as if the player has entered the mouth 2101 or the lower starting mouth 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes any value within the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). It can be said that the probability is high.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (the big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both of the low probability and the high probability. If it is set to a range close to the maximum value side, from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0, before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) The period from the time of reaching the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability), and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767). Comparing with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value drawing process is extremely higher in the former period than in the latter period. In other words, from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0, the value before the first value in the range of big hit determination values (big hit determination range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Comparing the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range. The probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to a value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Of these, one of the values will be set as the value randomly selected by the initial value selection process and will be set in the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot determination described above. It will count up and then count up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , The value obtained from the lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value. That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (the big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side. When the value is set to a range closer to, the value of the counter of the initial value updating type becomes 0 from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes (big hit determination range), the value before the first value (low hit value) The period up to the time when the probability becomes the value 32667, and the high probability becomes the value 31767) is irregular and rich in randomness. Thereby, for example, the game ball is raised by illicitly acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the radio wave toward the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. Even if a fraudulent act of pretending to have entered the starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the ranges of the big hit judging value (big hit judging range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

Note that the initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value, as shown in FIGS. 153 and 154. From the initial value to the minimum value (first value) in the range of big hit judgment values (first hit value) until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the range of big hit judgment values (first hit value) in the second cycle The time required is time T0. In the third cycle from the time T0, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the time T1, and the time T1 is shorter than the time T0. .. In the fourth cycle from the time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the time T2, and the time T2 is shorter than the time T1. .. As described above, in the initial value update type counter, by giving fluctuation to the time when the updated counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity The player will not be able to detect it.

[12-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a main control side power-on process as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 4100a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

After step S10, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S12), and it is determined whether a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. It Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time of power-on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S14 is performed based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110.

Subsequent to step S14, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 98 is operated (step S16). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU 4100a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S16, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S16, the RAM clear switch 4100e is cleared. The value 0 is set to the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a game relating to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"). It is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the information, and is set to a value 1 when the game information is erased and a value 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

Following step S18 or step S20, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S22). In this wait timer processing 2, the system waits until the system for controlling the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the liquid crystal control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 101 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

Subsequent to step S22, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Subsequent to step S26, whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined (step S28). If they match, it is determined whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in main control side power-off processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control-side power-off processing is normally completed, the work area of the main-control built-in RAM is set as power recovery (step S32). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 0, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power recovery" means that, in addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure, the high frequency is detected and reset, It also includes the state of returning after that.

Subsequent to step S32, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S34). In the power-on command creation processing, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is deleted, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Alternatively, if the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, if the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, the entire area of the main control internal RAM is cleared ( Step S36). Specifically, the value 0 is written in the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Further, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated to erase the game information, when the thumb value does not match Alternatively, when the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally terminated, a unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is extracted, and a big hit determination random number is based on the extracted ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating is executed, and this fixed value is set.

Following step S36, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S38). In this setting, the initial information is read from the ROM with built-in main control, and this initial information is set in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control.

Following step S38, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing is performed (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 119 for notifying that the main control internal RAM has been cleared and initialization has been performed, and the peripheral The test commands divided into the test related shown in FIG. 120 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

Following step S34 or step S40, interrupt initialization is performed (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

Following step S42, interrupt permission setting is performed. (Step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every 4 ms, ie, the interrupt period set in step S42.

Following step S44, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Subsequent to step S46, it is determined whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is output as the power failure notification circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. Input from. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When the power failure notice signal is not input in step S48, the non-winning random number updating process is performed (step S50). In this non-win/win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, a random number that is not related to winning/judging determination (big hit determination) is updated. In addition, the random number per normal symbol, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number updating process.

After step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and it is determined in step S48 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. For example, the non-winning random number updating process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S52, the starting opening solenoid 2105, attacker solenoid 2108, upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, upper special symbol storage display 1184, lower special symbol storage display 1187 shown in FIG. , The normal symbol display device 1189, the normal symbol memory display device 1188, the game state display device 1183, the round display device 1190 and the like are stopped the drive signal (step S54).

Following step S54, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S56). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, and excludes the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total.

Following step S56, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S58). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S58, clear setting of the watchdog timer is performed (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, as described above.

Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. The process of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by subsequent power restoration.

In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

[12-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 122 and 123.

When the main control timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 124 (step S70). At this time, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to the value B subsequent to the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

Following step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from its initial value.

Following step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020, 3020 shown in FIG. 98 for detecting the game ball entered in the general winning opening 2104, 2201 shown in FIG. 96, the large winning opening shown in FIG. 96. The detection signal from the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 98 for detecting the game ball entered in 2103, the upper start opening switch shown in FIG. 98 for detecting the game ball entered in the upper starting opening 2101 shown in FIG. The detection signal from 3022, the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 98 which detects the game ball entering the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. 96, and the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. 96 are passed. The detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 98 that detects a game ball, the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. 98, and a prize ball control process described later are transmitted. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 indicating that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 has normally received the prize ball command is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the upper starting opening 2101 and the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the lower starting opening 2102 are read. Then, the corresponding starting mouth winning commands shown in FIG. 120 and corresponding thereto are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. That is, when there is a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109, The starting mouth winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 that detect the game balls that entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 that detects the game balls that entered the large winning opening 2103. Detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the upper starting opening 2101, the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the lower starting opening 2102 , And the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2350 is first read as the first time when this switch input processing is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. It is read again as the second time. Then, the result read in the second time is compared with the result read in the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are processed for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings by the two readings for comparison and the two readings for the second to fourth times. Since it is possible, the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 can be improved.

Subsequent to step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process which will be described later, and the normal symbol described later and In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device 1189 lights according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control substrate 4110 normally issues various commands transmitted by the main control substrate 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). When it is determined whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the ACK signal has been received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal pattern fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. The ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured because the subtraction result becomes the value 0. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S76, a random number updating process is performed (step S78). In this winning random number update processing, the above-described big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 123, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for initial value determination for the big hit symbols and the random numbers for initial value determination for the small hit symbols are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), so each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Will count up. For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value). The value is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is counted up. When the counter for updating the big hit judging random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judging random number, the big hit judging initial value determining random number is updated by the hit random number updating process. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of lottery one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the big hit determination random number. In addition, the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by this winning random number update process. Ordinary symbol hit determination random numbers and the like are the same as the above-described big hit determination random number updating method, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, a big hit determination initial value determination random number, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and a small hit symbol initial value determination random number, the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 123 (main control Side win process), the non-winning random number updating process of step S50 and the winning random number updating process of step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the main routine, are respectively updated. If the number of times the non-winning random number updating process in step S50 is executed is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated due to unevenness in the processing time The big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S50.

Following step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 118 for paying out the game balls based on this input information is created, or with the main control board 4100. The self-check command shown in FIG. 118 for confirming the connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 96 and enters a ball, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110, or this prize ball command. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 4110 has normally received is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. Then, it is transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 4110 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 121. In the frame command receiving process of step S82, when these various commands are normally received as payer main serial data, information to that effect is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM. .. In addition, the command normally received as the payer serial data is shaped into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display of FIG. 120 (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame clear command State 2 command)), and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequent to step S82, fraudulent activity detection processing is performed (step S84). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the jackpot is not in the gaming state (when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2103), etc. Then, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 120 is created as an abnormal state, and is stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S84, special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for jackpot determination is extracted and coincides with the jackpot determination value previously stored in the ROM with built-in main control (big hit). Whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter that updates the big hit symbol random number and the probability variation hit determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM It is determined whether or not they match (determination as to whether or not a probability change occurs). Here, the “probability change” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than in a normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, as the range of the above-mentioned big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability, and the value is read from the normal time judgment table, whereas the value 31768 is set in the high probability. A value 32767 is set and is read from the probability change time determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing of step S86, whether the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match or not. When determining whether or not, the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the upper starting opening switch 3022, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 119 are created, while the lottery result is based on the lower starting opening switch 2109. In the special figure 2 synchronization effect related various commands shown in FIG. 119 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the upper special symbol display device 1185 or according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is set so as to light the lower special symbol display 1186, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as the big hit related ones shown in FIG. 119 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 96 is opened/closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the special winning opening 2103 is changed from the closed state to the open state twice (round), The output of the lighting signal to the two-round display lamp 1190a is set so as to light the two-round display lamp 1190a of the round display device 1190 shown in FIG. 92, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the round is performed 15 times. At some time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1190b is set so as to light the 15-round display lamp 1190b of the round display 1190 shown in 89, and the output is stored in the output information storage area as output information or the probability variation. The output of the lighting signal to the game state indicator 1183 is set so as to light the presence or absence of occurrence of a predetermined color, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S86, normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing is performed (step S88). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per determination random number is extracted and the gate information is stored in the gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Remember.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like this. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is set to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is set to the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is set to the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage, The gate information of the two sections is respectively shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is used so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the reserved sphere. The output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for normal symbol determination is taken out from this read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not the regular symbol hit determination value matches (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not the movable piece 2106 is opened/closed is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened in the left-right direction, and the game ball can be received in the lower starting opening 2102, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the universal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 119 are created and used as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1189 is set to light the normal symbol display device 1189 in accordance with the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and as described above as the output information. Stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination that has been taken out coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, various commands related to the normal electric character effect shown in FIG. 119. Is generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the movable piece 2106, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted normal symbol per determination random number does not match the normal symbol per determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM, the normal symbol is based on the above random symbol variation display pattern random symbol. The variable display pattern is determined, various commands classified as related to the universal figure synchronization effect shown in FIG. 119 are created, and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1189 is set so that the normal symbol display device 1189 is turned on, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of the main control I/O port 4100b based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 4110, or a big hit game. In the state, in addition to outputting a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 which opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 and outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2105 which opens and closes the movable piece 2106. , 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output information, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. It outputs various information (game information) signals relating to the game to the payout control board 4110.

Subsequent to step S90, peripheral control board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the transmission information is read from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data. In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine shown in FIG. 119 and classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related and special figure 2 tuning effect-related Commands, various commands classified as jackpot-related, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general figure synchronization effect-related, various commands classified as ordinary electric figure effect-related, shown in FIG. 120, Various commands classified into the notification display, various commands classified into the status display, various commands related to the test, and other classified commands are stored. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data is a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Following step S92, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S94, the register is switched (restored) (step S96), and this routine ends. When the main control-side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a stacks the contents of the general-purpose registers in a hardware manner and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved in the stack are read out and written in the original register. The main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[13. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 99 will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 143. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the payout control unit power-on process, and FIG. 127 is a payout control unit following FIG. 126. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a continuation of power-on processing, FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt processing, FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball removal switch operation determination processing, and FIG. 130 is a rotation. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of a corner switch history creating process, FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball gaze determining process, and FIG. 133 is an award. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of the ball prize ball stock number addition processing, FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of the ball rental prize ball stock number addition processing, and FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of the stock monitoring processing, FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process, FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout setting process, FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball removal setting process, and FIG. 139 is a ball. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of a scooping operation setting process, FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of a retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process, and FIG. 142 is an error canceling process. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch operation determination process, and FIG. 143 is a timing chart showing a signal process (a) during a payout operation by a ball lending and an input signal confirmation process (a) from a CR unit.

First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt process, ball removal switch operation determination process, rotation angle switch history creation process, sprocket fixed position determination skip process, ball gaze determination process, award Ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock monitoring processing, payout ball removal judgment setting processing, payout setting processing, ball ball movement setting processing, ball removal setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing The mismatch counter reset determination process and the error release switch operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball glide determination processing, prize ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball removal determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release switch operation determination process are one process of the main operation setting process of step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. The ball removal switch operation determination process, the rotation angle switch history creation process, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process, the ball glide determination process, the retry operation monitoring process, the mismatch counter reset determination process, the error release switch operation determination process, The priority order is set in the order of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls, prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball removal determination setting processing.

[13-1. Discharge controller power-on process]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 performs a payout control unit power-on process, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 4120a. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Subsequent to step S500, input/output setting (I/O input/output setting) is performed (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, I/O port input/output setting of the payout control MPU 4120a is performed.

Following step S502, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b shown in FIG. 108 is started (step S504). The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is composed of a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop IC. The voltage comparison circuit outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between +24V and the reference voltage or by comparing the voltage between +12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result indicates that when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred, its logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. In step S504, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 is started. This power failure clear signal is input to the clear terminal via the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, with its logic being LOW. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop PIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 can be applied. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

After step S504, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S506), and it is determined whether a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b inputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b inputs the power failure warning signal. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. It is determined in step S508 whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

Following step S508, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, is stopped (step S510). By stopping the output of the power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I/O port 4120b and is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a can set the D type flip-flop PIC22 in the latched state. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the output terminal 1Q when latching the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the preset terminal PR.

Following step S510, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated (step S512). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S512, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S514), while when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S512, the payout is issued. The value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in, for example, various flags and various information storage areas stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a. Various information stored (for example, award ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the award ball information storage area, and a CR communication information storage area) Is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set) is set, and is 1 when the payout information is deleted, the payout information Is set to a value of 0 when is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

Following step S514 or step S516, the setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM is performed (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

Following step S518, the stack pointer is set (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Following step S524, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout controller power-off process (power-off) to be described later (step S526). .. When they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout information, checkout value, and other payout backup information are stored and retained in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process of the payout controller, which will be described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the power-off process of the payout control unit is normally terminated, the work area of the payout control internal RAM is set as the power recovery time (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (hereinafter referred to as the “payout control built-in ROM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, The power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Thereby, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. The term "power recovery" includes not only a state in which the power is turned off and a state in which the power is turned on, but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step If the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, if the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared (step S532). ). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, a work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, interrupt initialization is performed (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

Following step S536, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S536, that is, every 1.75 ms.

Subsequent to step S538, it is determined whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b as the power failure notification. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When the power failure notice signal is not input in step S540, it is determined whether the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). The 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 1.75 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later, and has a value of 1, 1. Each value is set to 0 when 75 ms has not elapsed.

When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540 to determine whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input.

On the other hand, when the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S544), and the external watch dock An external WDT clear signal is output to the timer (external WDT) 4120c (turned on, step S546). The external WDT 4120c monitors the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I/O port 4120b when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped during the clear signal release time. Resetting is performed (the system of the payout control MPU4120a is regularly diagnosed as to whether or not it has runaway).

Following step S546, port output processing is performed (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (the prize ball command and the self-check command shown in FIG. 118) are normally received, and the payout motor 744. Various information such as drive information for performing drive control to, award ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860c are stored. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100 or the payout motor 744 is output. To the external terminal board 784 as a prize ball number information signal by outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 744, and actually outputting the game balls by the payout motor 744 (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 744 is actually 10 pieces). Each time the game ball is paid out, a prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784.), and a display signal is output to the error LED display device 860c.

Subsequent to step S548, port input processing is performed (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the error release switch 860a, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, a detection signal from the counting switch 751, a detection signal from the full-tank switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal. , A main payment ACK signal and the like from the main control board 4100 which informs that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later, and stores them as input information in the input information storage area. ..

Following step S550, timer update processing is performed (step S552). In this timer updating process, when the determination is made as to whether or not the ball-blurring state by the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 71 is determined, the ball-bending determination time and the payout rotating body 748 set as the determination conditions are set. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination is not performed, and the ball removal determination set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 70. Time, full tank determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. When a judgment is made as to whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the switch 750, the out-of-ball condition set as the judgment condition. In addition to performing time management such as determination time, the number of balls of the game balls received by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and paid out and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 do not match. Inconsistency counter reset determination time that is set as the determination condition when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of game balls that do not match is repeated Time management. For example, when the ball-judging determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 1.75 ms. Therefore, the ball-judging determination time is decremented by 1.75 ms each time this timer updating process is performed. The ball-blurring determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0.

In the present embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the ball out determination time is set to 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer updating process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are decremented by 1.75 ms, and the subtraction result becomes the value 0. The ball removal determination time, full tank determination time, out-of-ball determination time, and mismatch counter reset determination time are accurately measured. It should be noted that these various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, CR communication processing is performed (step S554). In this CR communication process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input. To judge. The payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the signal logic state is set. By this processing, for example, even after an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. As a result, even when the payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power restoration. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication process, and while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, a momentary power failure or a power failure and CR Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of game balls cannot be continued, the number of prize balls stock PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery. By restoring the values such as the payout backup information to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. You can do it. In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or stop at the time of power restoration, even if the power is stopped or stopped. The various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved. Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control RAM in step S530. When the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal which informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is payout controlled. Output from the output terminal of the I/O port 4120b to the CR unit 6. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the above. When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. That is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball removal determination setting process, As the setting of the error state output to the CR unit 6, for example, when the communication with the CR unit 6 is not in progress, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible is set to PRDY. The signal output setting information is set and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process, the logical state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery. Output to the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary power failure, if the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored at the time of power recovery, so it is extremely effective after power recovery. At an early stage, the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b, and the CR unit 6 is awarded. It can be notified that the payout operation of the game balls by the ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit 6 at an extremely early stage after power recovery. In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, a CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, a pachinko game machine. When 1 is powered on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, the payout ball is paid out. In order to notify that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of the payout control I/O port 4120b to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, that is, pachinko. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are not electrically connected to each other through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, the ball is paid out. In order to inform that the pay-out operation for paying out is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and output from the output terminal of the pay-out control I/O port 4120b to the CR unit 6. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 4110. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Subsequent to step S554, full tank and out-of-ball check processing is performed (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-bulb check processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether or not the game balls are full, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 described above by a detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is a predetermined number or more. Is determined. For example, the determination whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the game balls stored is determined by the timer interruption period 1.75 ms in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing this time. When the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF in the previous full tank (1.75 ms before) and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection from the full tank switch 550 When the signal transitions from OFF to ON, the time counting of the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, whether the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the gaming space in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full is the status information described above. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the tank information storing area 546 stores the full tank information indicating that the gaming space in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is not full, in the state information storage area. To do.

To determine whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number, the timer interruption period of 1.75 ms is used to check whether the tank is full or running out of balls. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is ON in the process, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is OFF in the previous full (1.75 ms before) and out-of-ball check process, that is, detection from the out-of-ball switch 750. When the signal transits from OFF to ON, the time counting of the out-of-ball determination time (119 ms) described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, it is determined whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is ON, the out-of-ball information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is displayed. While storing in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is OFF, the fact that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not a predetermined number or more is notified. The out-of-ball information is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (the prize ball command and the self-check command shown in FIG. 118) are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is abnormal (various command signals are abnormal). The information is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area.

Following step S558, command analysis processing is performed (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

Following step S560, main operation setting processing is performed (step S562). In this main action setting process, action settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal and ball scooping are performed, retry actions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. To do.

Following step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various kinds of information are read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860c of the payout control board 4110 is created, and are stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-described ball-out information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on this ball-out information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not more than the predetermined number, a corresponding display is made. Data (display value 1 (numeral "1") in the present embodiment) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, command transmission processing is performed (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame) which are classified into the state display shown in FIG. State 2 command) is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on the out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or more than the predetermined number, the frame state 1 command Is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

Following step S566, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 4120c is stopped (OFF, step S568). This clears the external WDT 4120c so that the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I/O port 4120b are not reset. When the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped, the external WDT 4120c starts measuring the clear signal release time.

After step S568, the process returns to step S540 again, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is not input, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1 in step S542. If the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to a value of 0 in step S544. In step S546, an external WDT clear signal is output (ON) to the external WDT4120c, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, timer update processing is performed in step S552, and CR communication is performed in step S554. Processing is performed, full tank and out-of-bulb check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, and LED display is performed in step S564. Data creation processing is performed, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 4120c is stopped (OFF) in step S568, and steps S540 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S540 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a varies. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a secures the processing time so that the other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). By this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control internal RAM is prevented, and the above-described rewriting of the payout information is protected. Following step S570, the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b via the payout control I/O port 4120b (step S572). As a result, the D-type flip-flop PIC22 can release the latched state by outputting the power failure clear signal. Following step S572, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is stopped (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped. Following step S574, the external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 4120c to stop the output (ON/OFF, step S576). This clears the external WDT 4120c. Following step S576, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the total is calculated. Following step S578, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information. Subsequent to step S580, the setting for prohibiting access to the payout control built-in RAM is performed (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected. Following step S582, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned on/off to the external WDT 4120c. Therefore, the external WDT 4120c outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I/O port 4120b for resetting. After that, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout control unit power-on process again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) is reset when a power outage or momentary power failure occurs, and the payout control unit power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[13-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (1.75 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 125 to 127.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register, as shown in FIG. (Step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout controller from being destroyed.

Following step S590, a value of 1 is set in the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 1.75 elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 1.75 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms, and when the 1.75 ms has elapsed, the value is 1, 1. Each value is set to 0 when 0.75 ms has not elapsed. Following step S592, register switching (return) is performed (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is prevented from being overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process. Following step S594, interrupt permission is set (step S596), and this routine ends.

[13-3. Ball switch operation determination process]
Next, the ball removal switch operation determination process will be described. In this ball removal switch operation determination process, it is determined whether the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 99 is operated.

When the ball removal switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball removal switch 860b is operated, as shown in FIG. 129 (step S600). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the detection signal is stored in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S600, the input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b. When the input information includes a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b is operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the input information, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b is not operated.

When the ball removal switch 860b is operated in step S600, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S602). This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 70, and has a value of 1 when the game balls are discharged. , Is set to 0 when the game ball is not discharged.

Following step S602, the above-mentioned ball removal determination time is set to be valid (step S604), and this routine is ended. When the ball removal determination time becomes valid, the ball removal determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127.

On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is not operated in step S600, this routine is finished as it is. The ball removal flag RMV-FLG set in step S602 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

[13-4. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation angle switch history creation process will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 99 is created.

When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout control internal RAM, as shown in FIG. (Step S610). The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

Following step S610, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the detection signal is stored in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S612, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When the input information includes a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the detection slit 749a shown in FIG. It is determined that the state has transitioned. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit 749a determines that the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

When the detection slit 749a is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transited from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information is performed (step S614). In this shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is used as the most significant bits B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2. , B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

Following step S614, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and this routine is ended.

On the other hand, when the detection slit 749a is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information shift processing is performed (step S618). In the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614 is performed, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is set to the most significant bit. B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. To do.

Following step S618, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and this routine ends.

As described above, every time the rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit 749a is formed. The value of the least significant bit B0 is set according to the state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 transits from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the state in which the detection slit 749a transitions the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[13-5. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip processing skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 71 is in the fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is also made when the payout of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotating shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started without the occurrence of the ball.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0, as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to perform the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748, and has a value of 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed (when skipped), When the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed (when not skipped), the value is set to 0.

In step S630, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (when not skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed, the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control RAM is rotated. The angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“B” represents a bit.”” in the present embodiment, and the higher 4 bits B7 to B4 are the value 0 and the lower 4”. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have a value of 1, the detection slit 749a described above continues to be detected by the light of the rotation angle switch 752 in four timer interrupt cycles. This means that the axis is in a state where the axis is transited from the interrupted state to the non-interrupted state. When the timer interrupt cycle is generated four times, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 99 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotor 748 of the rotation detection board 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 shown in FIG. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotating body 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but due to this backlash. The rotation of the payout rotating body 748 is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in about two steps. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed, The history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation process shown in FIG. 130, and the lower 4 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. This is performed based on bits B3 to B0, that is, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 generated by the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 744 is rotated by four steps, so that it is rotated more than the rotation of the payout rotor 748 due to the backlash, and the rotation of the payout rotor 748 due to the backlash is absorbed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotary member 748 due to backlash, and thus it is possible to correctly manage the rotational position of the payout rotary member 748 with the rotational position of the payout motor 744. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt cycle of 4 times is 7 ms (=1.75 ms×4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the fixed position determination skip flag. The value 1 is set in SKP-FLG (step S636). As a result, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 can be set not to be performed (skipped). The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748.

Following step S636, the skip determination time is set valid (step S638), and this routine ends. Here, as shown in FIG. 72, the detection slits 749a are three in the same number as the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and are formed on the outer periphery of the rotation detecting board 748 at equal intervals (every 120 degrees). There is. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotor 748 of the rotation detection board 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747, as described above. In this embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749 (dispensing rotor 748) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 744 in 18 steps.

The payout control MPU 4120a manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744. Specifically, (1) the detection slit 749a has a transitional state (referred to as "edge detection state") in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 transitions from the blocked state to the non-blocked state, and (2) the detection slit 749a. A state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transited from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position confirmation state”), and (3) the detection slit 749a blocks the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state. The state is managed in three states: a state that has transited to a state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 744, the fixed position confirmation state of (2) corresponds to four rotations of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 is managed by the rotation of a total of 18 steps. ..

In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), since the detection slit 749a is a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the skip determination time rotates the payout motor 744 by 13 steps. The time is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 1.75 ms, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms (=1.75 ms×13 steps).

When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. The payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to the initial value 0.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S630 (when skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed, or in step S634, step S634 is performed. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, this routine is finished as it is. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 70, taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. Be guided to. When the game balls are rubbed against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball device 740 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 71 is provided with a rotation angle switch 752, and the detection signal from this rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. Also, the wiring (harness) that connects between the payout control board 4110 and the prize ball case inside board 754 in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 71 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game balls. Cheap.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-described (3) fixed position determination skip state, that is, the detection slit 749a is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is blocked from a non-blocked state. In the state of transition to, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed. This improves the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748. Note that the cycle and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748 can be calculated in advance as described above, so the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[13-6. Ball Judgment Processing]
Next, the ball gaze determination processing will be described. This ball-blurring determination processing determines whether or not the ball-blurred state due to the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 71 has occurred.

When the ball gaze determination processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM to rotate from a rotation angle as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

Following step S640, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 752 (step S642). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S642, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the detection slit 749a rotates. It is a state in which the optical axis of the angle switch 752 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotator 748 is rotating, and it is assumed that the ball-bulging state has not occurred, and this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the ball is seen. The value 1 is set to the medium flag PBE-FLG (step S644). The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-ball state due to the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. When the payout motor 744 is performing an overturning operation, the ball is 1 The value is set to 0 when only the operation is not performed.

Following step S644, the ball entangling determination time is set to be valid (step S646), and this routine ends. When the ball gaze determination time becomes valid, the ball gaze determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. ..

[13-7. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, a process for adding various prize ball stock numbers will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes a prize ball stock number addition processing and a ball rental prize ball stock number addition processing. The prize ball stock number addition processing is performed from the main control board 4100. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. The process of adding the number of prize ball stock for ball rental is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and subsequently, the award ball stock number addition process for ball rental will be described. In the present embodiment, the award ball stock number addition process for award balls is set to be performed with priority, and the award ball stock number addition process according to the award ball stock number addition process for an award ball is performed. After the game balls have been paid out by the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 71, it is set to perform the prize ball stock number addition process for ball rental.

[13-7-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command (step). S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information. In step S650, the received command information is read from this received command information storage area and it is determined whether or not it is a prize ball command.

When the received command information is not the prize ball command in step S650, this routine is ended as it is, while when the received command information is the prize ball command in step S650, the prize ball number PBV corresponding to this prize ball command is set to the prize ball. It is read from the number information table (step S652). The award ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the award ball command and the award ball number PBV.

Following step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls not yet paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in the present embodiment. ing. Thereby, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

The prize ball number PBV read in step S652 is added to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and this routine is ended. Note that the prize ball command read out in step S650 after addition in step S656 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[13-7-2. Addition process for the number of award balls for ball rental]
Next, the award ball stock number addition process for renting a ball will be described. When the award ball stock number addition process for ball rental is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a ball rental request signal, as shown in FIG. (Step S660). This determination is performed based on the ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S660, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a ball rental request signal.

When there is no ball loan request signal in step S660, this routine is ended as it is, while when there is a ball loan request signal in step S660, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control RAM. (Step S662), the number of lent balls RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is ended. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of lent balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the ball rental request signal read in step S660 is deleted from the input information storage area. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the prize balls are prioritized (the prize balls and the ball rental are separately managed), the ball rental request signal is held even when there is a ball rental request signal. The payout of balls will be made upon completion of the payout of prize balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of balls is performed after the prize ball stock number PBS becomes 0.

[13-8. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. In this stock monitoring process, is the player not continuing the game while the game is being performed in a state where the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. This is the process of monitoring.

When the stock monitoring process is started, as shown in FIG. 135, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 stores the award ball stock number PBS from the award ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control RAM. It is read (step S670), and it is determined whether the read number of prize ball stock PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The cautionary threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, the value 50 is set as the cautionary threshold value TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S674), and this routine is ended. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player has started stocking game balls in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of unpaid game balls (the above-mentioned prize ball stock number) is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that the warning threshold value TH has been reached, and is set to a value 1 when the warning threshold value TH is exceeded or higher and a value 0 when the warning threshold value TH is not reached.

On the other hand, if the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S676), and this routine is ended.

When the game state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and pays attention to the effect unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 101, the player inadvertently pays out as a prize ball for one round. The played game ball may not be pulled out by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 from the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls are collected in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540. When the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH, which is shown in FIG. 53 as a caution effect. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 blink. By this blinking, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player is paying attention to the game. As a result, the clerk of the hall can inform the player that the game ball is removed from the lower plate 302, and the player has filled the lower plate 302 (the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540) with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

In the present embodiment, the cautionary threshold value TH is set to a value 50, which is approximately one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player's attention should be paid to the game at the earliest possible stage.

[13-9. Processing for determining whether to dispense payout balls]
Next, the payout ball removal determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball removal determination setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 71 pays out the game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19, or the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. It is a process of setting whether to discharge the game balls stored in the tank rail 731 from the pachinko gaming machine 1, perform a ball bending operation, or do not perform such payout or discharge. ..

When the payout ball removal determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 is rotated from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. 136. The angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S680).

Following step S680, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 71 (step S682). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the retry error flag RTERR- It is determined whether FLG is 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is abnormally operating, and has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and when the retry operation is not abnormally operating (retry The value is set to 0 when the operation is operating normally.

In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. , If the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, if the retry operation is not abnormal, it is determined whether or not the in-ball flag PBE-FLG is 1 ( Step S686). The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-ball state due to the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. When the payout motor 744 is performing an overturning operation, the ball is 1 The value is set to 0 when only the operation is not performed.

In step S686, if the in-bulb flag PEB-FLG is not 1 (value is 0), that is, if the inclining operation is not performed, the award ball stock is stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. The number of PBSs is read (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the number of prize ball stock PBSs read is greater than 0 (step S690). This determination determines whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 744.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid number of balls, is the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 filled with the stored game balls? It is determined whether or not (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information and the full tank information stored in the out-of-ball check processing of step S556 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main processing of the payout control unit) illustrated in FIG. 127. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, full tank information is read from this state information storage area and it is determined whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls stored therein.

When the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is not full with the stored game balls in step S692, a payout setting process described later is performed (step S694), and this routine ends. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

On the other hand, in step S692, when the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls, this routine is finished as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped. When prize balls are generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls shown in FIG. 133. Will increase.

On the other hand, in step S690, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (value 0), that is, when there is no unpaid number of balls, it is determined whether the ball removal flag RMV-FLG has the value 1. Yes (step S696). This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731. When the game balls are discharged, the value is 1, and the game balls are not discharged. At this time, the value is set to 0. The determination in step S696 is performed based on the determination result in step S600 in the ball-extracting switch operation determination process shown in FIG. That is, when the operation signal (detection signal) from the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 99 is input, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S602 in the ball removal switch operation determination processing.

When the ball removal flag RMV-FLG has a value of 1 in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are discharged, ball removal setting processing described later is performed (step S698), This routine ends. In this ball removal setting process, a ball removal operation for discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 is performed.

Thus, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated after the power is turned on, the ball removal setting process is performed in step S698 of this payout ball removal determination setting process, and the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731. Is designed to be discharged. When this discharge is completed, the value 0 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG.

On the other hand, when the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are not discharged, this routine is finished as it is. .. As a result, the game balls are neither paid out nor discharged.

On the other hand, in step S686, when the in-ball squeezing flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the swaying operation is performed, a swaying operation setting process to be described later is performed (step S700), and this routine is ended. In this ball-bending operation setting process, a ball-bending operation for eliminating the ball-bending state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

On the other hand, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S702). .. In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

Following step S702, the error status output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S704), and this routine ends. In step S704, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is currently unavailable, the payout control MPU 4120a does not communicate with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, In other words, when the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the logic state of the PRDY signal is retained, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Remember. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 to the CR unit 6 through the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal board 869. To do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal board 869. It should be noted that “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. At some time (the EXS signal is held rising), it is to maintain its logic HI.

[13-9-1. Payment setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 71 is driven to set the payout of game balls.

When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110 reads the drive command number DRV from the payout control internal RAM, as shown in FIG. 137 (step S710). The drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and has the same value as the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S710, it is determined whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination determines whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains based on the drive command number DRV.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set ( Step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

Following step S714, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and the actual ball count PB is read (step S718). This real ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. Although this detailed description will be given later, this count is obtained from the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 71 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout controller power-on process (payout controller main process) shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual sphere count PB is read from the prize sphere information storage area.

Subsequent to step S718, a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S720). The value 0 is set to the actual ball count PB (step S722), and this routine is ended. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is directly set as the drive command number DRV.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when the payout motor 744 has the number of game balls to be paid out, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S724, a value of 1 is subtracted from the drive command number DRV (decrement, step S726), and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the detection signal is stored in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S728, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

If there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the actual ball count PB is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S730), and this routine ends. The actual ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730.

On the other hand, if there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, this routine is finished as it is. As described above, the payout control MPU 4120a decrements the drive command number DRV in step S726, and when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination in step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented. Determines that one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. Therefore, in order to pay out the one ball that should be paid out again, the payout control MPU 4120a sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above. As a result, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination in step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, in other words, the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded up into the prize ball stock number PBS, so that the retry operation for paying out the one ball to be paid out can be performed again. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the game ball will not be paid out to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player's disadvantage due to the unpaid game ball.

[13-9-2. Ball removal setting process]
Next, the ball removal setting process will be described. In this ball removal setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 71 is driven to perform a ball removal operation of discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. Is.

When the ball removal setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 138 (step S740). This determination is performed based on the ball removal determination time updated by the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the ball removal determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S740, the time management information is read from this time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed. The payout motor 744 performs a ball-removing operation during the ball-removal determination time. This ball removing operation discharges the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731.

When the ball removal determination time has not elapsed in step S740, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to perform the ball removal operation (step S742), and this routine ends. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the ball removal determination time has elapsed in step S740, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to end the ball removal operation (step S744). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S744, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S746), and this routine ends. This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, as described above, and has a value of 1 when the game balls are discharged. The value is set to 0 when the game ball is not discharged.

[13-9-3. Sphere movement setting process]
Next, the ball-bending motion setting process will be described. The ball-bending operation setting process is a process of setting to eliminate the ball-bending state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG.

When the ball-bending operation setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball-bending judgment time has elapsed (step S1402). S750). This determination is performed based on the sphere-judging determination time subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) illustrated in FIG. 127. Specifically, the ball gaze determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the ball-bending determination time has elapsed.

If it is determined in step S750 that the ball deviation determination time has not elapsed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752).

Following step S752, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 752 (step S754). This determination determines whether the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, a ball bending operation is performed. The output of the drive signal to the dispensing motor 744 is set to be performed (step S756), and this routine is ended. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout motor 744. The stop of the drive signal to is set (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S758, a value 0 is set to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball entangling operation (step S760), and this routine is ended. The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-ball state due to the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. When the payout motor 744 is performing an overturning operation, the ball is 1 When the only motion is not performed (end of the ball tilt motion), the value is set to 0, respectively.

On the other hand, when the ball entrainment determination time has elapsed in step S750, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S762, the error state output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When falling and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the lowered state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 to the CR unit 6 through the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal board 869. To do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal board 869. Note that "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that the logic LOW is maintained when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held) as described above, and the EXS signal is maintained. Is HI (the EXS signal is rising and held), that logic HI is maintained.

Subsequent to step S764, the value 0 is set to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG to end the ball entrainment operation (step S766), and this routine is terminated.

[13-10. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation for paying out the game ball that should be paid out again is normally performed.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM to switch the rotation angle switch as shown in FIG. The detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S770).

Following step S770, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 752 (step S772). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and is "000011111B ("B" represents a bit)" in the present embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the inconsistency counter INCC is displayed. Only the value 1 is added (increment, step S774). This inconsistency counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of balls of the game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 72 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. It is a counter for doing, and normally, the number of balls of the game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 match, so the value is It becomes 0. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 137. Therefore, by this retry operation, the number of balls of the game balls received by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and paid out, and actually The number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 and the payout of game balls that do not match due to a mismatch with the number of balls are determined by monitoring with the inconsistency counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area is incremented.

Following step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. At times, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S780 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as the input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S776, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the value 1 is subtracted from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrement, step S778).

Following step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unsatisfied gaming ball will be paid out by the retry operation is about several millionth, and in the present embodiment, it is inconsistent. The value 5 is set as the threshold value INCTH. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, as described above, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the power is restored. The information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, it is possible to continue monitoring the payout operation (retry operation) of the game balls by the prize ball device 740, which has been performed until immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure, from the time of the power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is normally performed, that is, the prize ball. It is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the device 740 is in the normal state, and even when the power is restored, it is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in the normal state by the determination in step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. Even when the power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state even when the power is restored.

When the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the message "retry error" is indicated. In order to inform, the retry error information for displaying the number "5" is set on the error LED indicator 860c, which is the segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 4110, and the above-mentioned state information storage area of the payout control RAM is set. Is set (stored) (step S782).

Following step S782, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 98 is operated and the external factor is generated. There is. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 98 erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above, and outputs the RAM clear notification command. Is output to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound is made to flow from the side speakers 130, 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. 79. It has become.

Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and the retry operation is not abnormally operating (the retry operation is When operating normally, the value is set to 0 respectively.

Note that the payout control MPU 4120a sets the retry error information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM in step S782 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. In the command transmission process of step S566, a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100, and in the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the same process, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860c is created. The LED display information is stored in the output information storage area, and a drive signal is output to the error LED display 860c based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output processing of step S548 in the same processing, and this error is output. The number "5" is displayed on the LED display 860c. The main control board 4100 which has received the status command transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 101, a door frame side lighting blink command for outputting a lighting signal for causing a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the above to emit light in a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment). It outputs and makes a plurality of LEDs emit light of a predetermined color. As described above, the clerk or the like in the hall who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 to display the number "" on the error LED display 860c mounted on the payout control board 4110. By visually observing that "5" is displayed, it can be confirmed that a "retry error" has occurred. Thereby, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the clerk at the hall or the like checks the malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. As compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860c are not notified, the operation can be performed extremely quickly.

Further, by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751, the game ball received by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and paid out is made difficult to detect, and the retry operation described above is forcibly generated, Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed, if the value of the above-described inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 Since a plurality of LEDs of (1) emit light, a clerk or the like in the hall will rush to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, the player who commits the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continue to obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player performing the cheating is the same as the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, that is, 5 balls. Therefore, the damage to the hole due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 can be suppressed to an extremely small level.

Further, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC determines that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of the internal factor of becoming. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized, for example, when an external factor such as the operation of the error canceling switch 860a shown in FIG. 99 occurs. Therefore, even if the error release switch 860a or the like is tampered with and the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC is forcibly initialized by such an illicit act. There is no.

[13-11. Mismatch counter reset judgment processing]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset processing, the difference between the number of balls of the game sphere received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 72 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 is calculated. This is a process of determining whether or not to reset the calculated inconsistency counter INCC.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141 ( Step S790). This determination is performed based on the inconsistency counter reset determination time updated in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

If the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the mismatch counter reset determination time is initialized (step S792). By this initialization, the initial value 7000s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

Following step S792, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794), and this routine is ended. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. The value of the counter is 0, because the number of game balls received by the recess 748a of the payout rotating member 748 and paid out is the same as the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. Become. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 137. Therefore, by this retry operation, the number of balls of the game balls received by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and paid out, and actually The number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 and the payout of game balls that do not match due to a mismatch with the number of balls are determined by monitoring with the inconsistency counter INCC. With the pachinko game machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unsuccessful game ball will be paid out by the retry operation is about several millions. Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the gaming board 4 and a frame body such as the main body frame 3 on which the gaming board 4 is mounted. By exchanging the gaming board 4 (replacement of a new machine). Since the game specification can be changed, a payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 71, a drive power supply for the prize ball device 740, and a control power supply for the payout control board 4110 are generated in FIG. 79. The power supply board 851 shown in is mounted on the frame side as a common function. As described above, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 can determine the abnormal operation whether the retry operation is repeated by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC. In the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 127, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before shutoff is stored when the power is shut off, while the payout control unit power-on shown in FIG. 126 is performed. In the processing of step S530 in the time processing (setting at power recovery of the RAM work area), the processing is restarted from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on. Then, when the power is cut off and the gaming board 4 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is replaced with a gaming board 4'having a different game specification from the gaming board 4 and the power is turned on, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the board 4110 starts the process again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 4 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. In other words, when the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming board 4'installed, the inconsistency counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the pre-replacement gaming board 4 is inherited as it is. Therefore, the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the gaming board 4'is mounted, and by chance, there is a probability of one millionth of a number, and the number of unmatched gaming balls occurs, causing an inconsistency counter INCC. When the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the mismatch threshold value INCTH described above, the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the retry operation is an abnormal operation within a short period of time when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4′. May occur. That is, in a period shortly after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4', a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. Although the error does not occur, there is a possibility that the retry operation is suddenly determined to be an abnormal operation. In this way, when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the replacement game board 4′ is new, but the impression is that the game board 4′ is likely to malfunction. It may be given to the player. The probability that one inconsistent game ball will be paid out due to the retry operation is one in the millions, and the pachinko game machine 1 of the present invention is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the business hours of the hall. In the case of, the probability that one unsatisfied game ball due to the retry operation is paid out is the same as one ball, so in the processing of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring processing shown in FIG. With the probability of 1, the value 1 cannot be subtracted. Then, in one week, the inconsistency counter INCC is incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 1, and in two weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 2. In the week, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC is the value 3, and in 4 weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC is the value 4 by 5 weeks. The inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which corresponds to the above-described inconsistency threshold INCTH. That is, after 5 weeks have passed, the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so the payout control MPU 4120a determines from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 140. It is determined that there is no detection signal, and it is determined that there is a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. In the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in 140, in order to notify that there is a “retry error”, a number “” is displayed on the error LED display 860c which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110. The retry error information indicating "5" is set and set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines in step S790 in this inconsistency counter reset determination process that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeatedly performed. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting it, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of a few millionths described above is performed. It is disabled. As a result, an error occurs in the retry operation even though there is no malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, or the like. It is possible to prevent the retry error information that conveys the message from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control RAM.

In addition, by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751, it is difficult to detect the game ball that has been received by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and is paid out, and the retry operation described above is forcibly generated. Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, in the case where the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short time, as described above, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is When it becomes equal to or higher than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that a clerk or the like in the hall rushes to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, the player who commits the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continue to obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. On the other hand, when the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long time so that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC does not exceed the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the inconsistency counter INCC is changed every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although it is reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player who engages in cheating during this period is, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC up to the mismatch threshold INCTH and the counting switch 751 is intentionally set. The number of game balls that can be obtained by a player who commits an illegal act can be extremely reduced even when the game machine is repeatedly deactivated for a long time.

[13-12. Error release switch operation determination processing]
Next, the error release switch operation determination process will be described. In this error release switch operation determination processing, it is determined whether or not the error release switch 860a shown in FIG. 99 is operated.

When the error release switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110 determines whether the error release switch 860a is operated as shown in FIG. 142 (step S800). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the error canceling switch 860a in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the error canceling switch 860a. When the input information includes the detection signal from the error canceling switch 860a, it is determined that the error canceling switch 860a is operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the error canceling switch 860a in the input information, it is determined that the error canceling switch 860a has not been operated.

When the error release switch 860a is not operated in step S800, this routine is ended as it is, while when the error release switch 860a is operated in step S800, error flag state confirmation processing is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination processing, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information regarding the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 71 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (the retry operation is operating normally). Since it is set, the payout control MPU 4120a confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1.

Following step S802, state information setting processing is performed (step S804). In this status information setting process, based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the status information corresponding to the error flag is set to It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127, various information (state information) is read from the state information storage area, and the read state information is read. Based on the above, a status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, it is determined that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127, A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

Note that the main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 124, and the peripheral control board 4140 A retry operation error notification process is performed to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification processing, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of "Please check the prize ball unit." and "Please check the harness of the payout control board." (2 times.) Repeatedly by flowing from the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. The clerk in the hall will be notified. The clerk in the hall or the like who hears the error notification announcement of the retry operation, the trouble of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. Can be confirmed much earlier than when the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light of a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

Following step S804, cancellation setting processing is performed (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, it corresponds to the error flag based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forcibly stopping the contents displayed by the error LED display 860c, which is the segment display already mounted on the payout control board 4110, or that the ball lending is ready. In order to convey to the above, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is kept at HI, that is, in the activated state, and the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormally operating is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the error LED indicator 860c has already been displayed. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" for notifying that there is a "retry error", the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above is "normal". The information to which the graphic "-" for notifying the effect is displayed is forcibly overwritten. Also, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball can be lent out, the logic of the PRDY signal is kept at HI, that is, the state is raised, and the payout control I/O port 4120b is connected to the gaming ball lending device connection. Output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

Following step S806, error flag initialization processing is performed (step S808), and this routine ends. In this error flag initialization processing, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the error flag is set based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormal is a value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, a value 0 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 through the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal board 869. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicates the internal factor when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. When the error release switch 860a is operated while the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process when the occurrence of the error occurs, the external error is caused by this. When the error occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 0 and initialized. It should be noted that the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set when the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 98 is operated, that is, when the error release switch 860a is operated. Similarly, initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

[13-13. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication processing, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing at the time of the payout operation by the ball lending will be described, and subsequently, the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, as the amount of money, the number of game balls for 200 yen (in the present embodiment, 50 balls, and the amount of 25 yen for 100 yen is paid out twice) is set as the number of lent balls. A case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are stored in the read input information by reading the input information from the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. Checks the logical state of the BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal from the input information every 1.75 ms which is the interrupt timer period.

[13-13-1. Signal processing during payout operation by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out the ball. When the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation is possible is set to the logical state, as shown in FIG. 143(d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to convey the PRDY signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, it is started up and held and output from the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and as PRDY via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to the CR unit 6 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player presses the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 17, the ball lending switch 365b is turned on (turned on). The operation signal is input to the CR unit 6 as the TDS shown in FIG. 100 from the frequency display plate 365 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls, so as shown in FIG. 143(a), BRDY, which is a ball request signal, is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). .. This BRDY is input to the payout control I/O port 4120b as a BRDY signal.

As shown in FIG. 143(b), the payout control MPU 4120a to which this BRDY signal is input is set to the lending request monitoring time HA (in the present embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms) from the timing H1. ) Has passed, a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, 100 yen as the amount of money in one payout operation from the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls, etc. It is monitored whether or not BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out.

The CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls for 100 yen among the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. ), the BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like by the time the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the payout control I/O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

As shown in FIG. 143(c), when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU 4120a starts timing H2 and outputs the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in the present embodiment, It is set to 20 ms±1 ms.), the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the start-up state is held and the payout control I It is output from the /O port 4120b, and is output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

The CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input, as shown in FIG. 143(b), until the lending instruction monitoring time HC (set to 20 ms to 58 ms in this embodiment) elapses from the timing H3. , BRQ which is started up and held from timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 through the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 143(c), the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation from timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set). The predetermined number of lent balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen, is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal started and held from the timing H3 is output as the EXS signal from the payout control I/O port 4120b with the logic set to LOW, that is, held in the lowered state. It is output to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like (timing H5).

The CR unit 6 pays the remaining 100 yen of the game balls out of the number of 200 yen balls as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. ), the next request confirmation timing HE (in the present embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5, BRQ, from the CR unit 6 to the game ball and other rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

Similarly, when the payout control MPU 4120a pays out the number of game balls for the remaining 100 yen to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 143(c). , The rising and holding EXS signal is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b while keeping its logic as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and as EXS through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to the CR unit 6 (timing H7).

The CR unit 6 stands up from the timing H1 as shown in FIG. 143(a) until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (set to 268 ms at maximum in this embodiment) elapses from the timing H7. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The loan request monitoring time HA, the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, the lending instruction monitoring time HC, the payout monitoring time HD, the next request confirmation timing HE, and the CR unit loan completion monitoring time HF described above are the payout control shown in FIG. 127. The time is counted by the timer updating process of step S552 in the process of turning on the power to the unit (main process of the payout control unit).

Note that the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 when the ball is out, the ball is out, the counting switch error, the retry error, the full tank, or the like (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, when it is held after falling, as shown in FIG. 143(d), the PRDY signal that was started and held from the timing H1 is set to LOW, that is, the state of falling. The data is held and output from the payout control I/O port 4120b, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 through the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like (timing H9). On the other hand, while communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when the logic is rising and held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the payout is performed. The data is output from the control I/O port 4120b, and is output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. “Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( The EXS signal is held at the rising edge) to maintain its logic HI.

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a sets the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls worth of yen twice, the game balls with the lent number of 50 balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. In addition, a setting staff (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6 is operated by a clerk or the like in the hall, and, for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used as the number of balls to lend to the upper plate 301, When the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen once as the amount to be paid out to the lower plate 302, the number of gaming balls for 500 yen as the amount is set as the number of lent balls. When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 5 times, and the number of game balls for 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of lent balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[13-13-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 allows the CR unit 6 to output the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the terminal for connecting to the rental device such as a game ball 869, even after the above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Then, even if the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not activated, or even if the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, the CR unit 6 connects BRDY and the CR unit 6 connects the lending device such as a game ball. Through the terminal board 869, output to the payout control board 4110, the signal is not lowered, or even if the above-described next request confirmation timing HE has elapsed, the CR unit 6 plays the BRQ from the CR unit 6 The CR unit 6 outputs the signal to the payout control board 4110 via the ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the signal is not raised, or even when the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF described above elapses. Is output to the payout control board 4110 from the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and when the signal is not dropped, the above-mentioned PRDY and EXS are used to set the BRQ and Confirm whether BRDY is normal or not. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 143(e) and 143(f), the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and then a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment, from this timing J0). , 200 ms±1 ms)), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the lowered state is held and output from the payout control I/O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and is output as PRDY. , Outputs to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal board 869 for playing game balls, etc., sets the logic of the EXS signal to LOW, that is, holds the lowered state, and outputs from the payout control I/O port 4120b, EXS As a result, the data is output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for lending the game balls (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J1 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JB (200 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J1. That is, it is held in the activated state and is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from timing J2 to LOW after a predetermined period JC (100 ms±1 ms is set in the present embodiment) from timing J2. That is, it is held in a lowered state and is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J3 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JD (set to 100 ms±1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J3. That is, it is held in the activated state and is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from the timing J4 to LOW after a lapse of a predetermined period JE (100 ms±1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J4. That is, it is held in a lowered state and output from the payout control I/O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J5 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JF (set to 10000 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J5. That is, it is output from the payout control I/O port 4120b while being kept in the activated state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6).

The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are clocked by the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127.

[14. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receives various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 149. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller power-on process, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 146 is an example of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process. 147 is a flow chart, FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interruption processing, and FIG. 149 is a rotation detection switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example.

As shown in FIG. 101, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral controller power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral controller V blank interrupt processing, peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing, peripheral controller power failure notice signal interrupt processing, rotation detection. The switch history creation process will be described. The rotation detection switch history creation process is executed as one process of the operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[14-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[14-1-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral controller 4150 shown in FIG. 101 performs peripheral controller power-on processing, as shown in FIG. 144. When the peripheral controller power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). This initialization processing includes processing for initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, hot start/cold start determination processing, and processing for setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs from the main control board 4100 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, for example, as shown in FIGS. 119 and 120. , It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 102, effect backup information (1fr) that is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc. The production backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up to is compared with the production backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), and the comparison contents When the two match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. When the hot backup is performed by copying back the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) with respect to Bank0 (1 ms), while the compared contents do not match (that is, , (When they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c, for cold start.

Further, in the hot start/cold start determination processing, also for the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. 102, the effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. (SRAM) is compared, and the production backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), is compared. When the compared contents match each other, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage region which is normally used in peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is set to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Forcibly write 0 to start cold. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed target work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 102 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 101 to reset the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to get it covered.

Following step S1000, current time information acquisition processing is performed (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the year/month/day and the time information for specifying the hour/minute/second are acquired from the RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in (4), the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage section and the current time information is set in the time information storage section. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the liquid crystal display is performed so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is obtained. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the device 1900 and lighting it is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and is currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, is included. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Sometimes, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information to turn on the LED, and the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is used. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on at a luminance of 80%, the luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not performed at all. Has become. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent being done. In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing this current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. Is set to 0 when not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, triggered by the input of a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, it is determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to get it covered.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, first, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control steady processing is completed.

Subsequent to step S1009, a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process is performed (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is activated The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN to count the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, lamp data output processing is performed (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. 101 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 102 is used to perform continuous transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port. When the serial transmission for the lamp drive board serial I/O port is started, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Gaming board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 4 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 102 specifies the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is stored. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the head address is passed through the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai to the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. The data of 1 is started to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board is set. It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and the game. In synchronization with the board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In the lamp data output process, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 101 is performed. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is used to perform serial transmission of serial I/O ports for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It has been created and set in the creation process. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area The first 1 byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the head address of the 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I/O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a trigger (in this embodiment, the serial I/O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. Then, the data is transferred to and written in the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written in this. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Subsequent to step S1012, operation unit monitoring processing is performed (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various kinds of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation (rotation direction of dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in operation unit 400). ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are set based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Whether or not the portion 405 is operated is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the rotation direction of the dial operation portion 401 and the operation state of the pressing operation portion 405 are reflected in the game effect.

Following step S1014, display data output processing is performed (step S1016). In this display data output processing, one screen (one frame) of drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation processing described later is displayed by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a on the channel CH1 shown in FIG. Output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. As a result, various screens are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the display data output process, when drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, it is canceled to output the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. By this means, it is possible to prevent a delay in processing time, but so-called frame drop occurs, but by the lamp data output processing of step S1012, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 96 are displayed. A speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and a door frame 5 are provided by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 53 and sound data output processing described later. This is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization between the effects from the speakers 130, 222, and 262, such as music and sound effects that match various effects.

Following step S1016, sound data output processing is performed (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation processing described later is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data, and music and sound effects are output. In addition, the sound data of the notification sound or the notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, the right audio data is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. At the same time as the transmission, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data that is a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, and the notification sound and the notification sound are stereo. It will be played.

Following step S1018, scheduler update processing is performed (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 102 is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order that configures the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the screen data from the first screen data to the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

In the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in time series, which constitutes the emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the emission data from the first emission data to the emission data of various LEDs is determined. The pointer is updated in order to indicate whether the mode is set.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data such as the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data from the first sound command data to output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

In addition, in the scheduler update processing, from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, The pointer is updated to instruct which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt, which will be repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described below occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor/solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, received command analysis processing is performed (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received by peripheral control command reception interrupt processing described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 102. , Analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. As various commands, various commands shown in FIG. 119 are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands are classified into special figure 2 tuning effect-related, various commands are classified into jackpot-related, and power-on is classified. Various commands, various commands related to general-purpose figure effect production, various commands related to normal electric-role effect production, various commands shown in FIG. 120 classified into notification display, and classified into status display There are various commands, various commands related to the test, and various other commands.

Following step S1022, warning processing is performed (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 120, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is displayed. Various control data of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, such as set screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electric drive source schedule data. It is extracted from the copy area 4150ce and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of high priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically made. It is supposed to do. As a result, it is possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing the information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the abnormality is resolved. You can

Following step S1024, RCT acquisition information update processing is performed (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, which is acquired in the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The time information stored in the time information storage unit is updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, lamp data creation processing is performed (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and based on the light emission data pointed to by the pointer, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order forming the light emission mode generation schedule data. , The peripheral control unit of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. The peripheral control ROM 4150b of the 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce and created, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is created by extracting it from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set in the LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, display data creation processing is performed (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is selected from the peripheral control unit among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Rendering data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, sound data creation processing is performed (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data designated by the pointer is It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number. In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, and the board volume 0 is set to mute and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the sound volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, the audio data is audio data that is serialized by the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects can be played from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound have a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion at all, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 can be set from the mute to the maximum volume by the program. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-described seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222 provided in the door frame 5 are set. , 262, the effect sounds such as music and sound effects are reduced, but when a problem occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume is generated). It is possible to play the notification sound set to (). Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with the music or the sound effect. Announces that it is highly possible to increase the volume of sound played to increase the volume of music and sound effects and to produce a more powerful screen on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

Following step S1032, backup processing is performed (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 102 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every one frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 102, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Which is included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is stored in the Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, using the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3(1fr) and Bank4(1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to copy to the backup first area 4150cb to Bank1 (1fr), and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 4150ac specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) should be copied to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) should be changed from Bank0 (1fr). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the top address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to the bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and then Bank0 (1fr). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to the backup second area 4150cc to Bank4 (1fr). Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously contiguous by Bank4 (in the second area 4150cc). 1fr) are all copied in order from the start address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac operates at high speed in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM), using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as effect backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 102 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 4150ac specifies that the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is copied to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 4150dc. From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. Then, from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously contiguous in Bank4 (second) of backup second area 4150dc. All are sequentially copied from the start address of the SRAM).

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

Subsequent to step S1036, a value 0 is set in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral controller steady processing (step S1038), the process returns to step S1006 again, and a value 0 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Is set and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing". This peripheral control unit steady process starts by setting the value 1 to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG on the assumption that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and executes the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010. After performing steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036, and finally setting the value 0 in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as execution completion of the peripheral controller steady processing in step S1038, the process is completed. Will be done. The peripheral controller steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to about 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is about 33. It is 0.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[14-1-2. Peripheral control unit power-on process in door frame according to second embodiment]
Subsequently, in the door frame 5 according to the above-described first embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 includes the liquid crystal display device 1900 provided in the game board 4 in the peripheral control unit power-on process described above (here, " A game board side liquid crystal display device 1900") is used for drawing control. In addition to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the door frame 5 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. The drawing control of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 provided in the plate unit 300 in 'will be briefly described. Here, among the above-mentioned peripheral controller power-on processing, the drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are different. A part will be briefly described, and most control of each process is the same as the peripheral control unit power-on process described above, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

First, in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral controller power-on process, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is a game board side liquid crystal display device for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM in the display data creation process. The drawing data for 1900 is output from the channel CH1 shown in FIG. 103(b) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the one plate (one frame) of the plate generated in the built-in VRAM in the display data creation process is also displayed. Drawing data for the side liquid crystal display device 470 is output to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 from the channel CH2 shown in FIG. 103(b).

In the operation unit monitoring process of step S1014 in the peripheral control unit power-on process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal of the dial operation section 401 (rotational direction) and various operations of the pressing operation section 405, etc. (for example, created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 102, in which the rotation (rotational direction) history information of the dial operation section 401 and the operation history information of the pressing operation section 405 are set. The presence or absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is monitored, and when it is determined that the pressing operation unit 405 has been operated, a display mode (FIG. 155(a)) in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (See FIG. 155(b)), the background image of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is black, and a predetermined message is displayed in the center of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Control) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to switch the display area to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In order to perform control for unrolling in the display area of the side liquid crystal display device 470, when the next 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an instruction is issued to update the pointer in the scheduler update processing of step S1020 of this routine described above. In addition, by operating the pressure operation unit 405 again during the blackout effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display mode before the blackout effect, that is, on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Control for returning to the display mode (see FIG. 155(a)) is performed.

In the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in the display data creation process of step S1030 in the peripheral controller power-on process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screens arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data are displayed. Of the data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts the game board side character data shown in FIG. 103(b) from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data. Sprite data is created and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is generated in the built-in VRAM, and the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is shown in FIG. 103(b). The upper plate side character data is extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

[14-1-3. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 101, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 can be received is input from the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed upon the occasion will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 145 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed and the peripheral control is executed. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1. However, this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is assumed to be executed as the peripheral control unit steady process in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is forcibly canceled on the way and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, for the purpose of preventing this, steady processing is performed at step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. The fact that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 in the processing flag SP-FLG is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply of FIG. In the peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, the peripheral control unit V blank indicating that the peripheral control unit steady process is completed by setting the value 0 in the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1038 of the process at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady process). By notifying the signal interrupt process, whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not it has been completed. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 144 next time. Then, a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, which has been omitted, is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. 144. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but when there is the peripheral control unit steady process of this time that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is missed, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[14-1-4. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 144 will be described. .. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150 a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 101 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 146. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer starting in the 1ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to about 30 fps per second as described above, and therefore the interval at which the V blank signal is input is about 33. It is 0.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

In step S1100, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, this routine is finished as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V as the priority order of the interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 144. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor/solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 102 are arranged in time series. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, according to the drive data designated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. Is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 102 is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I/O port. When continuous transmission of serial I/O ports for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached is first set. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. 102 is generated from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is set. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first 1 byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 4150caf is used to drive the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for writing. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a trigger (in this embodiment, the serial I/O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using a bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller. 4150ad, and the peripheral I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is transferred to and written in the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data of the transmitted transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 102 is used to perform serial transmission for the motor drive board serial I/O port. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 96 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and created. The data is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted through the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I/O port. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to set 1 of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port is stored). It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I/O port.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In the movable body information acquisition processing, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, it is possible to acquire the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4.

Following step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43 are input, and thereby the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches ( For example, the rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like are created, and the operation of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. It is set in the unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence/absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired.

Following step S1108, a backup process is performed (step S1110), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 102 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, every time the 1ms interrupt timer in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 102 occurs. Each time the backup is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms) are included. , And the effect information (1 ms) that is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as the effect backup information (1 ms), in the backup first area 4150 cb, the peripheral control is performed in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms). The DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 102 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and change the contents stored in the beginning address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 4150ac specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are copied to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 (1ms). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the start address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc, and Bank0 (1 ms). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) consecutively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to the backup second area 4150cc to Bank4 (1ms). Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are consecutively transferred to Bank4 (second) of backup second area 4150cc. (1 ms), all are copied in order from the start address.

As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 144, various processes relating to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of effects are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt process is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched. In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted. In some cases, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[14-1-5. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 101, when various commands from the main control board 4100 are started to be transmitted as serial data, is triggered by this, and the main control serial data is built into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the reception buffer by the board serial I/O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and the mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 is within a period that can be received, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is followed by the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the period in which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the status of 3 of the main circumference serial data When the byte sum value is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which has already been fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202, is regarded as a numerical value, and the total (sum value ) Is calculated.

Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data of the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise and is changed to different main circumference serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. Of the status allocated as the first byte of and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data, the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached are shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. This reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cac. The "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. It stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when the end of the buffer is reached. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the second byte of the main circumference serial data received when the peripheral control MPU4150a stores the status in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is stored in association with each other, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period over which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 is exceeded. If, or, in step S1214, the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[14-1-6. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing executed when the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 104 is input via the main control board 4100 will be described. To do. When the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 101 first activates the 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and the power failure advance notice signal is input. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1302). If the power failure notice signal is not input in this determination, this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. When the power failure notice signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is, while the power failure notice is issued. When the signal is input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is this routine is started.

In step S1304, when the peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt process which is the main routine is started and the power outage notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, the power saving process is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. By suppressing the above, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the commands being transmitted at least for a period of 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 102 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. However, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in succession, all are sequentially copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to request the cause. The contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0(1fr) are designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank2(1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and are stored in Bank0(1fr). From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), consecutively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Then, all are sequentially copied from the top address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) and specify the copy to the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to this point are copied in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the top address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and the peripheral control MPU core is copied. 4150aa transfers the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the request command area of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. By designating copy, the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are predetermined. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied sequentially from the head address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S1312). If the power failure notice signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 102 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 101 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power outage notice signal is not input in step S1312 or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power outage notice signal is input. That is, it will continue to infinitely determine whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input. By continuously determining in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can output a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e when the power failure advance notice signal is not input in step S1312. While the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset and the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314 and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 144 is restarted.

As described above, when the power outage notification signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset immediately before the power outage occurs due to the WDT clear processing in step S1314. It has become. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure notification signal is canceled in the endless loop due to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, and therefore the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are not connected. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage advance signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the power failure warning signal is not continuously input and released in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[14-1-7. Rotation detection switch history creation process]
Next, a rotation detection switch history creation process executed as one process of the operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 146 will be described. This rotation detection switch history creation processing creates history of detection signals from the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401 shown in FIG. 43, respectively.

When the rotation detection switch history creation processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 101 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is read from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the RAM 4150c (step S1400). The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" is a bit). Of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, and from the rotation detection switch 432b. The history of the detection signal is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST.

Following step S1400, it is determined whether or not there are detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b (step S1402). This determination is made when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, among the plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c arranged in a row at a constant interval on the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operation unit 401 shown in FIG. While the one rotation detecting piece determines that the optical axis of the rotation detecting switch 432a has transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the one rotation detecting piece rotates when there is no detection signal from the rotation detecting switch 432a. It is determined that the optical axis of the detection switch 432a has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state. Further, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, it is determined that one rotation detection piece is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b transits from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, while the rotation detection switch 432b outputs the signal. When there is no such detection signal, it is determined that one rotation detection piece has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b from the blocking state to the non-blocking state.

When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a or a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b in step S1402, shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information is performed (step S1404). In the shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST read in step S1400 is set to the most significant bits B7←B6, B6←B5. , B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←the least significant bit B0, and so on, while shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, while the rotation detection switch 432b When there is a detection signal from, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400 is set to the most significant bits B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1. , B1←least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1404, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. If shifted, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1406), and this routine is ended.

On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a in step S1402 or when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information is performed (step S1408). In this shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information in step S1404 is performed, and when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection read in step S1400. The switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is converted into the least significant bit B0 by the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←the least significant bit B0. From the most significant bit B7 to the most significant bit B7 while there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read at step S1400 is changed to the most significant bit B7←B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1408, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. If shifted, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1410), and this routine is ended.

As described above, every time this rotation detection switch history creation processing is executed, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. , The value 1 or the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0, so that the history of the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can be created.

Next, based on the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST described above, is the dial operation unit 401 in a stopped state (in other words, the dial drive motor 414 is out of step). 150) to FIG. 152, a method of determining whether it is a clockwise rotation state or a counterclockwise rotation state will be described. FIG. 150 is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches in accordance with the clockwise rotation of the dial operation portion in the rotation operation unit, and FIG. 151 is the dial operation portion in the rotation operation unit. 152A is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of FIG. FIG. 152B is a list showing ON/OFF of the pair of rotation detection switches, and FIG. 152B is a list showing ON/OFF of the pair of rotation detection switches according to the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit. is there.

As described above, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are each 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, " B” represents a bit), and the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a is shown as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST in FIG. The history of detection signals from the rotation detection switch 432b is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Remembered Therefore, the dial operation unit 401 is in a stopped state (in other words, the dial drive motor 414 is in a step-out state), is rotating in the clockwise direction, or is it counterclockwise? When it is determined whether or not the rotation is in the direction, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is read from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and whether the detection determination values match. Depending on whether or not. This detection determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 101, and is copied to the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 102 when the power is turned on. Are read out and used. The data preset as the detection determination value is “00001111B (“B” represents a bit.”)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. ing. In other words, this determination is performed based on whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the detection determination value match.

Specifically, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST have the value 1, the rotation detection switch 432a causes the dial operation unit 401 to continue after four 1 ms timer interrupts. Means that the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the rotation detection switch 410 has been detected. This means that the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401 following the generation of the timer interrupt.

Next, detection of the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by detecting the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401. ing. 150 to 152, the rotation detection switch 432a is described as "A" and the rotation detection switch 432b is described as "B". Further, Step 1 to Step 4 described below are four kinds of rotational positions of the dial operation unit 401 based on the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, respectively, and when the dial operation unit 401 rotates, Step 1 , Step 2, step 3, and step 4, the rotational position shifts sequentially. After shifting to step 4, the process returns to step 1 again.

When the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, as shown in FIG. 150, in step 1, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then the dial operation unit 401 is rotated. By the shift to step 2 accompanying the clockwise rotation, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b and the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation. The process proceeds to the step of not detecting the piece 410c. After that, as the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise to move to step 3, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 is moved to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, so that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b both rotate. The process proceeds to the step of not detecting 410c. Then, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a by the shift to step 4 due to the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The rotation detecting switch 432b moves to the step of detecting the rotation detecting piece 410c.

On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 151, as shown in FIG. 151, both rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then, By the shift to step 2 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a, and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c, while rotating. The detection switch 432b proceeds to the step of detecting the rotation detection piece 410c. After that, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b due to the shift to step 3 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b both detect rotation. The process proceeds to the step of not detecting the piece 410c. Then, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c by the shift to step 4 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b. Then, the rotation detecting switch 432b moves to a step in which the rotation detecting piece 410c is not detected.

That is, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the clockwise direction, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned on (the rotation detection piece 410c is detected)/off (the rotation detection piece 410c is not detected) operation as shown in FIG. As shown in, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both "ON" in step 1, and the rotation detection switch 432a continues to be "ON" in step 2, while the rotation detection switch 432b is "OFF". Then, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned "OFF" in step 3, the rotation detection switch 432a is kept "OFF" in step 4, while the rotation detection switch 432b is turned "ON". After that, the process returns to step 1 again, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both turned "ON".

On the other hand, in the ON/OFF operation of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. “ON”, the rotation detection switch 432b continues to be “ON” in step 2, while the rotation detection switch 432a is “OFF”. Then, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned "OFF" in step 3, the rotation detection switch 432b is kept "OFF" in step 4, while the rotation detection switch 432a is turned "ON". After that, the process returns to step 1 again, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both turned "ON".

When the dial operation unit 401 stops without rotating clockwise or counterclockwise, there is no change in the detection from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. Therefore, the rotation detection switch in steps 1 to 4 does not change. There is no switching between ON/OFF operations by 432a and 432b.

As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 based on the ON/OFF states in steps 1 to 4 described above. When the dial operation unit 401 is operated by the player's operation, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by detecting the ON/OFF switching of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. The direction of rotation can be grasped, and the fact that the dial operation unit 401 is in a stopped state can be grasped by detecting that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b have not been turned ON/OFF at all. You can

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a allows the player to press the dial operation unit 401 with a finger or a palm and press the dial operation unit 401 with a palm or a palm when performing control to rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise. When the rotation of 401 is forcibly stopped, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by detecting that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are not turned on or off at all. It can be understood that the dial drive motor 414, which is the stepping motor, is out of step.

[15. Production]
Next, an effect rendered in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variably displayed in the first display mode. Here, a player sitting directly on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is behind the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the course of the production of one variation drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. An example of the effect when there is another player standing at will be described. In addition, "1 variation" means that the first special symbol is the first special lottery result in which the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. 96 is selected by receiving the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101. As a result of the change from start to stop, or the second special lottery result in which the lower special symbol display device 1186 of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. 96 is selected by receiving the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102. There is a variable start as a second special symbol until it is stopped and displayed, and the effect drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is also performed in accordance with the variable display time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. There is.

The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the upper starting opening 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the lower starting opening 2102 is a command from the main control board 4100. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1460, so that as shown in FIG. 155(a), a decorative pattern 1900a is provided on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The decorative pattern 1900b is displayed in the center, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 1900c is started on the right side, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c is stopped to display the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. It can be recognized by the player (the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. 96). You can also check the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery. The decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c are translucent to the extent that a background image (daytime background image) can be visually recognized, the decorative pattern 1900a is from the upper left side to the lower left side of the display area, and the decorative pattern 1900b is from the center upper side to the center of the display area. To the lower side, the decorative pattern 1900c is variably displayed in a manner as if the reels are rotating from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area.

When the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are variably displayed and the decorative symbols 1900a and 1900c are stopped and displayed in the same symbol, the reach is reached, and when the decorative symbol 1900b is stopped and displayed in the same symbol as 1900a and 1900c, it is a big hit. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol 1900b is not stopped and displayed with the same symbols as the symbols 1900a and 1900c that are stopped and displayed, it is lost.

[15-1. Performance using the upper plate side liquid crystal display device provided in the door frame according to the second embodiment]
Subsequently, in the door frame 5 according to the first embodiment described above, drawing is performed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (herein, referred to as “game board side liquid crystal display device 1900”) included in the game board 4. However, in addition to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 55. The effect rendered in FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG. 155(b) and FIGS. 156 to 158 in addition to FIG. 155(a) described above. FIG. 155(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect for displaying a message for switching a plurality of decorative patterns from the first display mode to the second display mode, and FIG. 156 is an example of an effect following FIG. 155(b). 157 is a diagram showing an example of the effect following FIG. 156, and FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of the effect following FIG. 157. Here, the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the middle of the progress of one variation rendered on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. By operating 405, the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and an effect unfolded in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display. An example of the effect that continues in the display area of the device 470 will be described. Note that, as described above, the "1 change" is the first special lottery result in which the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. 96 is selected by receiving the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101. From the start of the change as the first special symbol until the stop display, or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. 96 is selected by receiving the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102. There is a change until the second special lottery result is started as a second special symbol and stopped and displayed, and the effect drawn on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is also the first special symbol or It is performed according to the time when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

First, a big difference between the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment and the door frame 5 according to the first embodiment is that in the door frame 5 according to the first embodiment, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source is a game board side liquid crystal display device. While the effect proceeds in the display area of 1900, in the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a synchronizes the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The point is that the production is advanced in the display areas of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the upper starting opening 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the lower starting opening 2102 is a command from the main control board 4100. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1460, so that the left side of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is decorated as shown in FIG. 155(a). The design 1900a, the decorative design 1900b in the center, and the variable display of the decorative design 1900c on the right side are started, and after the predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the decorative designs 1900a to 1900c is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special The player can recognize the lottery result (the first special symbol or the first special symbol displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 shown in FIG. 96 on the function display unit 1180). It is possible to confirm the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery even with the two special symbols). The decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c are translucent to the extent that a background image (daytime background image) can be visually recognized, the decorative pattern 1900a is from the upper left side to the lower left side of the display area, and the decorative pattern 1900b is from the center upper side to the center of the display area. To the lower side, the decorative pattern 1900c is variably displayed in a manner as if the reels are rotating from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area.

When the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are variably displayed (including the case where at least one of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is variably displayed), the game of sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. When a person operates the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 2, as shown in FIG. 155(b), the background image of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is black and the game board side liquid crystal display is shown. In the center of the display area of the device 1900, the message "The screen is switched. Please look at the liquid crystal below. It will return to this screen when you operate the button." The effect unfolded in the display area of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 provided in the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5′ shown in FIG. That is, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to continue the effect. The message MSG continues to be displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 during the blackout effect. This is a state in which the display area of the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 simply remains black when the hall clerk or the like passes in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is performing a blackout effect. This is also to prevent a clerk in the hall from misunderstanding that the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may have a problem. Also, the player finishes the blackout effect at his will. This is also to prevent the player from forgetting how to return when the display area of the plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is switched to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 again to continue the effect.

In this blackout effect, even if the change time (effect time) in one change ends, the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 2 again. If not, it is not possible to return to the display mode before performing the blackout effect, that is, the display mode in which the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 155(a). However, when this player leaves the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 waits for a customer, a demonstration is performed by the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and when this demonstration ends, FIG. The design symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in (a). As a result, when the player newly seated on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts playing, the background image of the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 155(b) becomes black, and the gaming board In the center of the display area of the side liquid crystal display device 1900, start the game from the state that the message MSG is displayed, "Switch screens. Look at the liquid crystal below. Press the button to return to this screen." There is no such thing.

In the blackout effect, the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 2 in accordance with the message MSG displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to perform the blackout effect. The previous display mode, that is, the display mode in which the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 155(a) is also returned.

When the blackout effect is started in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect unfolded in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 switches to the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and continues. To be done. Specifically, decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 are, as shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, on the left side of the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The variable display of the decorative pattern 470a, the decorative pattern 470b in the center, and the decorative pattern 470c on the right side is continued, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative patterns 470a to 470c is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special The player can recognize the lottery result (the first special symbol or the first special symbol displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 shown in FIG. 96 on the function display unit 1180). It is possible to confirm the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery even with the two special symbols). The background image in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is the same as the background image (daytime background image) in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 before performing the blackout effect. The decorative patterns 470a to 470c are translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized, the decorative pattern 470a is from the upper left side to the lower left side of the display area, and the decorative pattern 470b is from the central upper side to the central lower side of the display area. The decorative pattern 470c is variably displayed from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area in a manner as if the reels are rotating. After that, the decorative pattern 470b is variably displayed in a manner as if it jumps in the center of the display area (FIG. 156(a)).

Subsequently, in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, a background image with a dark background is displayed, making it difficult for the player to see (FIG. 156(b)), and the night background image is displayed from the dark background image. (FIG. 156(c)). Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols 470a and 470c is stopped and the decorative symbols 470a and 470c are stopped by the same symbol of, for example, "7", the reach mode is set, and the reach character 470g indicating that is displayed (FIG. 156(d). )).

Subsequently, in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the background image is displayed from the night background image to the daytime background image which becomes the daytime background, and the display of the decorative patterns 470a and 470c and the reach character 470g disappears. .. Then, behind the decorative pattern 470b, the next decorative pattern 470b' (for example, the decorative pattern 470b is a pattern of "5" and the decorative pattern 470b' behind it is a pattern of "6") is blurred to the extent that it can be visually recognized. It is enlarged and displayed in the state (FIG. 157(f))). Then, the decorative pattern 470b is cut into two decorative patterns 470ba and 470bb (FIG. 157(g)), and the decorative pattern 470b' (the pattern of "6") on the back becomes a state in which the contour becomes sharp and the front surface becomes sharp. Appears as a decorative pattern 470b. At this time, behind the decorative pattern 470b (the pattern of "5"), the next decorative pattern 470b' (the pattern of "7") is enlarged and displayed in a visually blurred state (FIG. 157(h)). .. Then, the decorative pattern 470b is cut into two decorative patterns 470ba and 470bb (FIG. 158(r)), and the decorative pattern 470b' (the pattern of "7") on the back becomes a state in which the contour is sharp and the front is changed. Appears as a decorative pattern 470b, and the decorative patterns 470a to 470c are displayed in the same pattern of "7" (FIG. 158(s)), which is a big hit, and a big hit character 470k that conveys that fact is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. It is displayed in the display area (FIG. 158 (t). Then, the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is switched again to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and a big hit game state effect is produced on the game board side liquid crystal display. It is unfolded in the display area of the display device 1900.

The effect unfolded in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 in FIGS. 156 to 158 described above is, as described above, performed by the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. If the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 is not operated, the blackout effect shown in FIG. 155(b) described above is not started, and shown in FIGS. 156 to 158 following FIG. 155(a) described above. The effect will be unfolded in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, one of the effects unfolded in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 in FIGS. 156 to 158 described above, for example, in FIG. 157(f), the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. When the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 2 again in accordance with the message MSG displayed in FIG. 2, the effects shown in FIGS. 157(g) to 158(t) are displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. The display area of 470 is switched again to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the effect is continued. Further, one of the effects unfolded in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 in FIGS. 156 to 158 described above, for example, in FIG. 158(r), the decorative pattern 470b has two decorative patterns 470ba and 470bb. If the player does not cut it and loses, unless the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 2, the display on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 continues. The variable display of the decorative patterns 470a to 470c is started in the area.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 2, black is displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The out effect is started and the effect unfolded in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to be continued. Since the effect unfolded in the display area of the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is obtained by the player playing the game, the player sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 looks into from behind and is free of charge. I don't want to be seen by other players.

Further, in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c are monotonously displayed in a variable manner and the probability of a big hit is low. Reach or a big hit may be a big hit if a flashy production such as a development reach in which the probability of being a big hit than this super reach is set higher in advance in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Not only the player sitting opposite the gaming machine 1, but also the other player standing behind the player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 watching this production, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 adjacent to the hall. Since I think that other players who will be seated in front of the other pachinko gaming machines that will be set up will not be disappointed not only by the player when such a flashy production ends up being a loss The player also becomes discouraged, and the relationship between the player and other players becomes awkward, and there is a desire to prevent this awkward relationship.

Further, there are other players who stand behind the player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and other players who sit on the other side of the pachinko gaming machine installed in the hall adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. If you are doing, you will not be a big hit with flashy production such as super reach and development reach that the probability of being a big hit is set high in advance, and if you lose it, it will not be a big hit despite the high probability of being a big hit, Since the player may feel embarrassed due to a loss, a player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a flashy effect such as super reach or advanced reach. There is also a desire not to be seen by other players who look into from the rear of the player or those who are seated opposite to another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when there is another player who is looking into and peeping at the player, it is embarrassing that the reach effect (especially flashy effect) in which the probability of being a big hit is set high in advance is lost. A player who does not want to play, or a player who feels awkward due to a flashy production and feels uncomfortable with other players who have seen the flashy production, is the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. By operating the pressing operation unit 405 of, the blackout effect is performed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the effect unfolded in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display. By continuously switching to the display area of the device 470, that is, the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 are changed in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. By switching to the decorative patterns 470a to 470c to be displayed, the effect unfolded in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is continued in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, so that the pachinko game machine 1 is faced. The liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side for other players who stop behind the seated player and other players who are seated in the hall adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. While making the stop display of the decorative symbols 470a to 470c in the display region of 470 difficult to visually recognize, the decorative symbols 470a to 470a in the display region of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are provided to the player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The stop display result of 470c can be easily visually recognized. As a result, a flashy effect is unfolded in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and even if the result of the win determination due to this flashy effect is not a big hit but is lost, the result of the win determination is given to the player. Only the player can be discouraged because only the player can know, and by not being discouraged by other players who cannot see this production, the player and other players The relationship with and will not be awkward depending on the result of the win/loss judgment. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation due to an awkward relationship between the player and another player. In addition, it is possible to prevent the contents of the production from being known by looking in.

In addition, by continuing the effect unfolded in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 by switching to the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the probability of a big hit is set to a high value in advance. Since the probability that the achieved reach effect (particularly flashy effect) is unfolded in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is increased, the reach effect unfolded in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is a big hit. The probability that will be set to a high value in advance means that another player who will stop behind the player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or that is installed in the hall adjacent to this pachinko gaming machine 1 There is a possibility that a player or the like sitting on the other side of the pachinko gaming machine will be aware of it.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 with a predetermined probability (in this embodiment, once per 100 fluctuations), 1 The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 101 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 144 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 146. Among them, the predetermined random number is updated and acquired in either one or both processes, and the determination is made based on the acquired random number.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 having the door frame 5'according to the second embodiment described above includes the main control board 4100 of FIG. 98 and the peripheral control board 4140 of FIG. The main control board 4100 is a main control side timer of FIG. 124 as a win/loss judgment as to whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 of FIG. The special symbol of step S86 in the interruption process and the special electric lottery control process in the special electric auditors product control process are performed, and the control commands that are the various commands of FIGS. 119 and 120 based on the result of the winning/judgment that is the lottery result are the main control of FIG. It is output in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the side timer interrupt processing. Based on the control command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 controls the peripheral control section power-on processing of step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control section power-on processing of FIG. And the production is proceeding in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing of FIG. 146.

This pachinko gaming machine 1 is further provided with a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 of FIG. 103, an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 of FIG. 103, and a pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 of FIG. The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 displays effects by various images in the display area and also a player other than the player sitting on the facing side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the player sitting on the facing side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can visually confirm the effect. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 displays effects by various images in the display area, and only the player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can visually recognize the effects. The pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 can be operated by the player to switch between the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to select the progress of the effect.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 controls the operation unit monitoring process of step S1014, the display data output process of step S1016, the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 149. In the display data creation process of step S1030, based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to display the game board side liquid crystal display. The effect in the display area of the device 1900 can be continued in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Specifically, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the effect in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is continuously displayed in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. As an aspect, decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 155(a) are the left side of the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 shown in FIG. 156. In, the variable display of the decorative pattern 470a, the decorative pattern 470b in the center, and the decorative pattern 470c on the right side is continued. Thereby, the player sitting on the facing side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can visually recognize the result of the winning determination from the effect continued in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, while facing the facing side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When a player other than the player who sits down cannot see the result of the winning determination from the effect continued in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the player sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to prevent the relationship between the player and another player other than the player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from becoming awkward due to the result of the win/loss determination.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment, based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 moves to the upper plate. By switching to the side liquid crystal display device 470 and being controlled so that the effect in the display region of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is continued in the display region of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the pachinko game machine 1 While the player sitting opposite the player can see the result of the winning judgment from the effect continued in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the player other than the player sitting opposite the pachinko gaming machine 1 can see the result. The player cannot see the result of the winning determination from the effect continued in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. As a result, compared to normal reach, which has a low probability of a big hit and is preset, a super-reach that is a big hit but has a high preset, and an advanced reach that has a higher probability of a big hit than this super reach are preset. Even if the result of the winning judgment due to the flashing presentation is a big hit without being a big hit, only the player gives the result of the winning judgment. Since it is possible to know, only the player is discouraged, and other players who cannot see this flashy production will not be discouraged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the door frame 5'according to the second embodiment described above, the main control board 4100 of FIG. 98 and the peripheral control board 4140 of FIG. 101 are provided. The main control board 4100 is a main control side timer of FIG. 124 as a win/loss judgment as to whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 of FIG. The special symbol of step S86 in the interruption process and the special electric lottery control process in the special electric auditors product control process are performed, and the control commands that are the various commands of FIGS. 119 and 120 based on the result of the winning/judgment that is the lottery result are the main control of FIG. It is output in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the side timer interrupt processing. Based on the control command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 controls the peripheral control section power-on processing of step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control section power-on processing of FIG. And the production is proceeding in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing of FIG. 146.

This pachinko gaming machine 1 is further provided with a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 of FIG. 103, an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 of FIG. 103, and a pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 of FIG. The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 displays effects by various images in the display area and allows the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and other players to visually recognize the effects. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 displays effects by various images in the display area, and only the player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can visually recognize the effects. The pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 can be operated by the player to switch between the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to select the progress of the effect. ..

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 controls the operation unit monitoring process of step S1014, the display data output process of step S1016, the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 149. In the display data creation process of step S1030, based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to display the game board side liquid crystal display. A display mode in which the effect in the display area of the device 1900 is continued in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and switching from the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is switched. With the display mode in which the effect in the display area of (1) is continued in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect can be advanced. Specifically, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the effect in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is continuously displayed in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. As an aspect, decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 155(a) are the left side of the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 shown in FIG. 156. In, the variable display of the decorative pattern 470a, the decorative pattern 470b in the center, and the decorative pattern 470c on the right side is continued. In addition, as a display mode in which the effect in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is continued in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 by switching from the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, For example, in FIG. 157(f), the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 2 in accordance with the message MSG displayed in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 155(b). When operated again, the effects shown in FIGS. 157(g) to 158(t) are switched again from the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to continue the effect. It is like this.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the door frame 5′ according to the second embodiment, based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 moves to the upper plate. Side liquid crystal display device 470 is switched to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to continue the effect in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the game board side liquid crystal Since the display device 1900 can be switched to the display device 1900 and the effect in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be continued in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect can be advanced. , The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the effect in the display area of the game plate side liquid crystal display device 1900 is continued in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. When proceeding, various images of the effect are displayed in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 that can be viewed only by the player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby producing the effect. While it can be visually recognized by a player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it may be difficult to see by another player who stands behind the player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. You can do it. With this, when there is another player standing behind the player who sits on the opposite side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if another player looks into the player, the effect is advanced in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The contents of are hidden from other players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the effect from being known by looking in.

Further, when another player standing behind the player sitting opposite the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a friend of the player sitting opposite the pachinko gaming machine 1, that friend is the gaming board side liquid crystal display device. In some cases, it may be possible to look into the contents of the effect that is being advanced in the display area of 1900, so whether or not the player sitting opposite the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 on his/her own will. By determining, it is possible to determine whether to switch from the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

[16. Another example]
It is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and can be implemented in various modes as long as they are within the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and gaming machines other than the pachinko gaming machine, such as slot machines or The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused (one that performs a slot game using a game ball).

1... Pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine), 2... Outer frame, 3... Main body frame, 4... Game board, 5... Door frame, 130... Side speaker, 222... Upper right speaker, 262... Upper left speaker, 821... Lower part Speaker, 400... Operation unit, 401... Dial operation part, 405... Press operation part (effect selection means), 470... Upper plate side liquid crystal display device (second effect display means), 1100... Gaming area, 1900... Liquid crystal display Device, game board side liquid crystal display (first effect display means) 2101, upper start opening, 2102 lower start opening, 4100 main control board (main control means), 4100a main control MPU, 4110... payout control Substrate 4110b... Blackout monitoring circuit 4140... Peripheral control substrate (production control means) 4140a... Volume control volume 4150... Peripheral control unit 4150c... Peripheral control RAM 4160... Liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160a... VDP with built-in sound source 4170... Lamp drive board 4180... Motor drive board.

(Solution 1)
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Sound output means for outputting a notification sound for notifying an abnormal state to the gaming machine, and a production sound according to the progress of the game,
Sound control means for controlling the sound output from the sound output means based on a command received from the main control means,
A player sound volume adjusting means that can be operated by the player to change the sound volume output from the sound output means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The sound control means has a plurality of sound setting units,
In the plurality of sound setting sections, effect sound data whose volume can be changed according to the operation of the player volume adjusting means, and notification sound data whose volume cannot be changed according to the operation of the player volume adjusting means And are set individually,
A synthesizing unit for synthesizing the sound data set in the plurality of sound setting units, and a synthesizing sound volume value setting unit for setting the second sound volume value synthesized by the synthesizing unit,
The plurality of sound setting sections are configured as a data setting area in one control element,
A first volume value that can be changed according to an operation of the player volume adjusting means is set in the sound setting section in which the effect sound data is set among the plurality of sound setting sections.
When the player operates the player volume adjusting means, the first volume value of the effect sound data set in the sound setting section can be changed,
Output from the sound output means based on the volume set by the composite volume value setting means,
When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the change of the first volume value by the player volume adjusting means is canceled.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Claims (1)

A plurality of audio output means for outputting a notification sound for notifying an abnormal state to the gaming machine, and a sound effect produced by the progress of the game,
Production display means,
First volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume output from the audio output means,
Production control means for controlling the voice output means and the production display means based on the progress of production,
A gaming machine comprising: a second volume adjusting means different from the first volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume output from the audio output means,
Of the first volume adjusting means and the second volume adjusting means, the first volume adjusting means is an adjusting means that cannot be operated by the player,
The effect control means,
Production sound volume adjustment control means for setting the volume of the production sound according to the operation by operating the first volume adjustment means,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the production sound volume is changed by operating the second volume adjustment means to change the volume of the production sound set by the production sound volume adjustment control means in response to the operation. Control means,
When the initialization condition is satisfied, effect sound initialization control means for setting the volume of the effect sound changed by the effect sound volume change control means to an initial volume not depending on the setting of the player,
Notification sound volume adjustment control means for setting the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying an abnormal state to the gaming machine in the abnormality notification period without depending on the sound volume set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means,
When the abnormality notification period ends, the volume of the effect sound is muted, and when the abnormality notification period ends, the volume of the effect sound is restored to the volume set by the effect sound volume change control means, and the effect sound is muted. Production sound progress continuation control means for continuing the progression of the production sound while
Sound output execution control means for executing control to output the effect sound and the notification sound from the sound output means,
The notification sound volume adjustment control means,
When the effect sound volume adjustment control means sets the volume of the effect sound to a low level in response to the operation of the first sound volume adjustment means, or the effect sound volume change control means operates the second sound volume adjustment means. Accordingly, in a state in which the volume of the effect sound set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means is being decreased, a volume higher than the volume of the effect sound is set as the volume of the notification sound,
The sound output execution control means,
A game machine characterized in that, in the abnormality notification period, the notification sound and the effect sound muted at the volume are combined, and the notification sound is output in a audible manner.